63760552a6b8e7ee777fd8a41290c628715d2cb1
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
1 \input texinfo
2 @setfilename ld.info
3 @c Copyright (C) 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4 @syncodeindex ky cp
5 @c man begin INCLUDE
6 @include configdoc.texi
7 @c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
8 @include bfdver.texi
9 @c man end
10
11 @c @smallbook
12
13 @macro gcctabopt{body}
14 @code{\body\}
15 @end macro
16
17 @c man begin NAME
18 @ifset man
19 @c Configure for the generation of man pages
20 @set UsesEnvVars
21 @set GENERIC
22 @set ARM
23 @set C6X
24 @set H8300
25 @set HPPA
26 @set I960
27 @set M68HC11
28 @set M68K
29 @set MIPS
30 @set MMIX
31 @set MSP430
32 @set NDS32
33 @set NIOSII
34 @set POWERPC
35 @set POWERPC64
36 @set Renesas
37 @set SPU
38 @set TICOFF
39 @set WIN32
40 @set XTENSA
41 @end ifset
42 @c man end
43
44 @ifnottex
45 @dircategory Software development
46 @direntry
47 * Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
48 @end direntry
49 @end ifnottex
50
51 @copying
52 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
53 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
54 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
55 @end ifset
56 version @value{VERSION}.
57
58 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
59
60 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
61 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
62 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
65 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
66 @end copying
67 @iftex
68 @finalout
69 @setchapternewpage odd
70 @settitle The GNU linker
71 @titlepage
72 @title The GNU linker
73 @sp 1
74 @subtitle @code{ld}
75 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77 @end ifset
78 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79 @author Steve Chamberlain
80 @author Ian Lance Taylor
81 @page
82
83 @tex
84 {\parskip=0pt
85 \hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86 \hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
87 \hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
88 \hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89 }
90 \global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91 @end tex
92
93 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
94 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
95 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
96
97 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
98 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
99 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
100 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
101 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
102 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
103 @c man end
104
105 @end titlepage
106 @end iftex
107 @contents
108 @c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
109
110 @ifnottex
111 @node Top
112 @top LD
113 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
114 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
115 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
116 @end ifset
117 version @value{VERSION}.
118
119 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
120 Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
121 in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
122
123 @menu
124 * Overview:: Overview
125 * Invocation:: Invocation
126 * Scripts:: Linker Scripts
127 @ifset GENERIC
128 * Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
129 @end ifset
130 @ifclear GENERIC
131 @ifset H8300
132 * H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
133 @end ifset
134 @ifset Renesas
135 * Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
136 @end ifset
137 @ifset I960
138 * i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
139 @end ifset
140 @ifset ARM
141 * ARM:: ld and the ARM family
142 @end ifset
143 @ifset M68HC11
144 * M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
145 @end ifset
146 @ifset HPPA
147 * HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
148 @end ifset
149 @ifset M68K
150 * M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
151 @end ifset
152 @ifset MIPS
153 * MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
154 @end ifset
155 @ifset POWERPC
156 * PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
157 @end ifset
158 @ifset POWERPC64
159 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
160 @end ifset
161 @ifset SPU
162 * SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
163 @end ifset
164 @ifset TICOFF
165 * TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
166 @end ifset
167 @ifset WIN32
168 * Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
169 @end ifset
170 @ifset XTENSA
171 * Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
172 @end ifset
173 @end ifclear
174 @ifclear SingleFormat
175 * BFD:: BFD
176 @end ifclear
177 @c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
178
179 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
180 * MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
181 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
182 * LD Index:: LD Index
183 @end menu
184 @end ifnottex
185
186 @node Overview
187 @chapter Overview
188
189 @cindex @sc{gnu} linker
190 @cindex what is this?
191
192 @ifset man
193 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
194 ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
195 @c man end
196
197 @c man begin SEEALSO
198 ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
199 the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
200 @file{ld}.
201 @c man end
202 @end ifset
203
204 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
205
206 @command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
207 their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
208 compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
209
210 @command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
211 a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
212 to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
213
214 @ifset man
215 @c For the man only
216 This man page does not describe the command language; see the
217 @command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
218 language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
219 @end ifset
220
221 @ifclear SingleFormat
222 This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
223 to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
224 write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
225 @code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
226 available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
227 @end ifclear
228
229 Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
230 linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
231 execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
232 @command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
233 (or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
234
235 @c man end
236
237 @node Invocation
238 @chapter Invocation
239
240 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
241
242 The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
243 and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
244 you have many choices to control its behavior.
245
246 @c man end
247
248 @ifset UsesEnvVars
249 @menu
250 * Options:: Command Line Options
251 * Environment:: Environment Variables
252 @end menu
253
254 @node Options
255 @section Command Line Options
256 @end ifset
257
258 @cindex command line
259 @cindex options
260
261 @c man begin OPTIONS
262
263 The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
264 practice few of them are used in any particular context.
265 @cindex standard Unix system
266 For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
267 object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
268 link a file @code{hello.o}:
269
270 @smallexample
271 ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
272 @end smallexample
273
274 This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
275 result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
276 the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
277 directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
278
279 Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
280 point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
281 as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
282 which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
283 files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
284 different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
285 occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
286 option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
287 noted in the descriptions below.
288
289 @cindex object files
290 Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
291 together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
292 options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
293 an option and its argument.
294
295 Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
296 specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
297 and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
298 are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
299 message @samp{No input files}.
300
301 If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
302 assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
303 augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
304 linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
305 permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
306 or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
307 @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
308 script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
309 extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
310 to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
311 the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
312
313 For options whose names are a single letter,
314 option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
315 whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
316 option that requires them.
317
318 For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
319 precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
320 @samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
321 this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
322 only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
323 @samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
324 name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
325 output.
326
327 Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
328 option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
329 immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
330 @samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
331 Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
332 accepted.
333
334 Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
335 (e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
336 prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
337 compiler driver) like this:
338
339 @smallexample
340 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
341 @end smallexample
342
343 This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
344 silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
345 may also arise when passing options that require values through a
346 driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
347 a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
348 and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
349 the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
350
351 @smallexample
352 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
353 @end smallexample
354
355 Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
356 linker:
357
358 @table @gcctabopt
359 @include at-file.texi
360
361 @kindex -a @var{keyword}
362 @item -a @var{keyword}
363 This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
364 argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
365 @samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
366 @samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
367 to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
368
369 @kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370 @item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
372 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
373 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
374 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
375 finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
376 it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
377 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
378 interface.
379
380 @ifset I960
381 @cindex architectures
382 @kindex -A @var{arch}
383 @item -A @var{architecture}
384 @kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
385 @itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
386 In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
387 Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
388 @var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
389 the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
390 archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
391 family}, for details.
392
393 Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
394 other architecture families.
395 @end ifset
396
397 @ifclear SingleFormat
398 @cindex binary input format
399 @kindex -b @var{format}
400 @kindex --format=@var{format}
401 @cindex input format
402 @cindex input format
403 @item -b @var{input-format}
404 @itemx --format=@var{input-format}
405 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
406 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
407 @samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
408 that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
409 configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
410 to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
411 default input format the most usual format on each machine.
412 @var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
413 supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
414 formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
415 @xref{BFD}.
416
417 You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
418 binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
419 linking object files of different formats), by including
420 @samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
421 particular format.
422
423 The default format is taken from the environment variable
424 @code{GNUTARGET}.
425 @ifset UsesEnvVars
426 @xref{Environment}.
427 @end ifset
428 You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
429 @code{TARGET};
430 @ifclear man
431 see @ref{Format Commands}.
432 @end ifclear
433 @end ifclear
434
435 @kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
436 @kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
437 @cindex compatibility, MRI
438 @item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
439 @itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
440 For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
441 files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
442 @ifclear man
443 @ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
444 @end ifclear
445 @ifset man
446 the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
447 @end ifset
448 Introduce MRI script files with
449 the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
450 scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
451 If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
452 specified by any @samp{-L} options.
453
454 @cindex common allocation
455 @kindex -d
456 @kindex -dc
457 @kindex -dp
458 @item -d
459 @itemx -dc
460 @itemx -dp
461 These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
462 compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
463 even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
464 script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
465 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
466
467 @kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
468 @kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
469 @item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
470 @itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
471 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
472 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
473 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
474 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
475 option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
476 The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
477
478 @cindex entry point, from command line
479 @kindex -e @var{entry}
480 @kindex --entry=@var{entry}
481 @item -e @var{entry}
482 @itemx --entry=@var{entry}
483 Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
484 program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
485 named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
486 and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
487 base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
488 @samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
489 and other ways of specifying the entry point.
490
491 @kindex --exclude-libs
492 @item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
493 Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
494 exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
495 @code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
496 automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
497 port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
498 explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
499 option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
500 be treated as hidden.
501
502 @kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
503 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
504 Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
505 should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
506 into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
507 may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
508 used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
509 the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
510 match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
511 command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
512 of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
513 regardless of this option.
514
515 @cindex dynamic symbol table
516 @kindex -E
517 @kindex --export-dynamic
518 @kindex --no-export-dynamic
519 @item -E
520 @itemx --export-dynamic
521 @itemx --no-export-dynamic
522 When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
523 option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
524 all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
525 set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
526
527 If you do not use either of these options (or use the
528 @option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
529 dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
530 referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
531
532 If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
533 back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
534 dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
535 linking the program itself.
536
537 You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
538 be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
539 See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
540
541 Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
542 support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
543 the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
544
545 @ifclear SingleFormat
546 @cindex big-endian objects
547 @cindex endianness
548 @kindex -EB
549 @item -EB
550 Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
551
552 @cindex little-endian objects
553 @kindex -EL
554 @item -EL
555 Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
556 @end ifclear
557
558 @kindex -f @var{name}
559 @kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
560 @item -f @var{name}
561 @itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
562 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
563 to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
564 table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
565 symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
566
567 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
568 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
569 the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
570 first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
571 @var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
572 in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
573 Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
574 implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
575 machine specific performance.
576
577 This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
578 will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
579
580 @kindex -F @var{name}
581 @kindex --filter=@var{name}
582 @item -F @var{name}
583 @itemx --filter=@var{name}
584 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
585 the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
586 of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
587 on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
588
589 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
590 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
591 dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
592 filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
593 found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
594 used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
595 @var{name}.
596
597 Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
598 toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
599 object files.
600 @ifclear SingleFormat
601 The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
602 @option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
603 @code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
604 environment variable.
605 @end ifclear
606 The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
607 creating an ELF shared object.
608
609 @cindex finalization function
610 @kindex -fini=@var{name}
611 @item -fini=@var{name}
612 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
613 executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
614 address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
615 the function to call.
616
617 @kindex -g
618 @item -g
619 Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
620
621 @kindex -G @var{value}
622 @kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
623 @cindex object size
624 @item -G @var{value}
625 @itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
626 Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
627 @var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
628 MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
629 sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
630
631 @cindex runtime library name
632 @kindex -h @var{name}
633 @kindex -soname=@var{name}
634 @item -h @var{name}
635 @itemx -soname=@var{name}
636 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
637 the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
638 which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
639 linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
640 field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
641
642 @kindex -i
643 @cindex incremental link
644 @item -i
645 Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
646
647 @cindex initialization function
648 @kindex -init=@var{name}
649 @item -init=@var{name}
650 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
651 executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
652 of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
653 function to call.
654
655 @cindex archive files, from cmd line
656 @kindex -l @var{namespec}
657 @kindex --library=@var{namespec}
658 @item -l @var{namespec}
659 @itemx --library=@var{namespec}
660 Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
661 list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
662 If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
663 will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
664 will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
665
666 On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
667 files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
668 and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
669 called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
670 @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
671 indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
672 to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
673 @var{filename}.
674
675 The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
676 specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
677 was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
678 command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
679 archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
680 the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
681
682 See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
683 archives multiple times.
684
685 You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
686
687 @ifset GENERIC
688 This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
689 if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
690 behaviour of the AIX linker.
691 @end ifset
692
693 @cindex search directory, from cmd line
694 @kindex -L @var{dir}
695 @kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
696 @item -L @var{searchdir}
697 @itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
698 Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
699 for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
700 option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
701 in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
702 on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
703 @option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
704 order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
705 how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
706 option is specified.
707
708 If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
709 by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the @samp{--sysroot} option, or
710 specified when the linker is configured.
711
712 @ifset UsesEnvVars
713 The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
714 @samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
715 some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
716 @end ifset
717
718 The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
719 @code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
720 at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
721
722 @cindex emulation
723 @kindex -m @var{emulation}
724 @item -m @var{emulation}
725 Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
726 emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
727
728 If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
729 @code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
730
731 Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
732 configured.
733
734 @cindex link map
735 @kindex -M
736 @kindex --print-map
737 @item -M
738 @itemx --print-map
739 Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
740 information about the link, including the following:
741
742 @itemize @bullet
743 @item
744 Where object files are mapped into memory.
745 @item
746 How common symbols are allocated.
747 @item
748 All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
749 which caused the archive member to be brought in.
750 @item
751 The values assigned to symbols.
752
753 Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
754 involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
755 have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
756 linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
757 of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
758 the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
759 linker script containing:
760
761 @smallexample
762 foo = 1
763 foo = foo * 4
764 foo = foo + 8
765 @end smallexample
766
767 will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
768 option is used:
769
770 @smallexample
771 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
772 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
773 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
774 @end smallexample
775
776 See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
777 scripts.
778 @end itemize
779
780 @kindex -n
781 @cindex read-only text
782 @cindex NMAGIC
783 @kindex --nmagic
784 @item -n
785 @itemx --nmagic
786 Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
787 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
788 mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
789
790 @kindex -N
791 @kindex --omagic
792 @cindex read/write from cmd line
793 @cindex OMAGIC
794 @item -N
795 @itemx --omagic
796 Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
797 not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
798 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
799 mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
800 is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
801 specification published by Microsoft.
802
803 @kindex --no-omagic
804 @cindex OMAGIC
805 @item --no-omagic
806 This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
807 sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
808 be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
809 shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
810
811 @kindex -o @var{output}
812 @kindex --output=@var{output}
813 @cindex naming the output file
814 @item -o @var{output}
815 @itemx --output=@var{output}
816 Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
817 option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
818 script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
819
820 @kindex -O @var{level}
821 @cindex generating optimized output
822 @item -O @var{level}
823 If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
824 the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
825 should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
826 option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
827 the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
828 no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
829 of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
830
831 @kindex --push-state
832 @cindex push state governing input file handling
833 @item --push-state
834 The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
835 flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
836 restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
837
838 The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
839 @option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
840 @option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
841 @option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
842 @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
843 @option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
844
845 One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
846 used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
847 listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
848 something as follows:
849
850 @smallexample
851 -Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
852 @end smallexample
853
854 @kindex --pop-state
855 @cindex pop state governing input file handling
856 Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
857 flags governing input file handling.
858
859 @kindex -q
860 @kindex --emit-relocs
861 @cindex retain relocations in final executable
862 @item -q
863 @itemx --emit-relocs
864 Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
865 Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
866 order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
867 in larger executables.
868
869 This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
870
871 @kindex --force-dynamic
872 @cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
873 @item --force-dynamic
874 Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
875 to VxWorks targets.
876
877 @cindex partial link
878 @cindex relocatable output
879 @kindex -r
880 @kindex --relocatable
881 @item -r
882 @itemx --relocatable
883 Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
884 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
885 linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
886 magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
887 @code{OMAGIC}.
888 @c ; see @option{-N}.
889 If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
890 linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
891 constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
892
893 When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
894 partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
895 relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
896 example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
897 with input files in other formats at all.
898
899 This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
900
901 @kindex -R @var{file}
902 @kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
903 @cindex symbol-only input
904 @item -R @var{filename}
905 @itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
906 Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
907 relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
908 to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
909 programs. You may use this option more than once.
910
911 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
912 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
913 the @option{-rpath} option.
914
915 @kindex -s
916 @kindex --strip-all
917 @cindex strip all symbols
918 @item -s
919 @itemx --strip-all
920 Omit all symbol information from the output file.
921
922 @kindex -S
923 @kindex --strip-debug
924 @cindex strip debugger symbols
925 @item -S
926 @itemx --strip-debug
927 Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
928
929 @kindex -t
930 @kindex --trace
931 @cindex input files, displaying
932 @item -t
933 @itemx --trace
934 Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
935
936 @kindex -T @var{script}
937 @kindex --script=@var{script}
938 @cindex script files
939 @item -T @var{scriptfile}
940 @itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
941 Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
942 @command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
943 @var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
944 output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
945 the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
946 specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
947 options accumulate.
948
949 @kindex -dT @var{script}
950 @kindex --default-script=@var{script}
951 @cindex script files
952 @item -dT @var{scriptfile}
953 @itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
954 Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
955
956 This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
957 processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
958 command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
959 @option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
960 behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
961 command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
962 the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
963 @samp{gcc}).
964
965 @kindex -u @var{symbol}
966 @kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
967 @cindex undefined symbol
968 @item -u @var{symbol}
969 @itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
970 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
971 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
972 modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
973 different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
974 option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
975
976 If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
977 into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
978 undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
979 instead.
980
981 @kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
982 @cindex symbols, require defined
983 @cindex defined symbol
984 @item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
985 Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
986 is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
987 is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
988 and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
989 @code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
990 can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
991
992 @kindex -Ur
993 @cindex constructors
994 @item -Ur
995 For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
996 @samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
997 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
998 @emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
999 It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1000 with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1001 be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1002 @samp{-r} for the others.
1003
1004 @kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1005 @cindex orphan sections
1006 @cindex sections, orphan
1007 @item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1008 Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1009 specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1010
1011 @var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1012
1013 @table @code
1014 @item place
1015 Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1016 the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
1017 @samp{--unique} also effects how sections are placed.
1018
1019 @item discard
1020 All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1021 @samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1022
1023 @item warn
1024 The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1025 issue a warning.
1026
1027 @item error
1028 The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1029 @end table
1030
1031 The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1032
1033 @kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1034 @item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1035 Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1036 @var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1037 missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1038 specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1039 multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1040 input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1041 in a linker script.
1042
1043 @kindex -v
1044 @kindex -V
1045 @kindex --version
1046 @cindex version
1047 @item -v
1048 @itemx --version
1049 @itemx -V
1050 Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
1051 lists the supported emulations.
1052
1053 @kindex -x
1054 @kindex --discard-all
1055 @cindex deleting local symbols
1056 @item -x
1057 @itemx --discard-all
1058 Delete all local symbols.
1059
1060 @kindex -X
1061 @kindex --discard-locals
1062 @cindex local symbols, deleting
1063 @item -X
1064 @itemx --discard-locals
1065 Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1066 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1067 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
1068
1069 @kindex -y @var{symbol}
1070 @kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1071 @cindex symbol tracing
1072 @item -y @var{symbol}
1073 @itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1074 Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1075 option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1076 to prepend an underscore.
1077
1078 This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1079 don't know where the reference is coming from.
1080
1081 @kindex -Y @var{path}
1082 @item -Y @var{path}
1083 Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1084 for Solaris compatibility.
1085
1086 @kindex -z @var{keyword}
1087 @item -z @var{keyword}
1088 The recognized keywords are:
1089 @table @samp
1090
1091 @item combreloc
1092 Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1093 lookup caching possible.
1094
1095 @item defs
1096 Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
1097 shared libraries are still allowed.
1098
1099 @item execstack
1100 Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1101
1102 @item global
1103 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1104 the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1105 of subsequently loaded libraries.
1106
1107 @item initfirst
1108 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1109 It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1110 before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1111 the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1112 the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1113 objects.
1114
1115 @item interpose
1116 Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1117 but the primary executable.
1118
1119 @item lazy
1120 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1121 dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1122 the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1123 Lazy binding is the default.
1124
1125 @item loadfltr
1126 Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1127 runtime.
1128
1129 @item muldefs
1130 Allows multiple definitions.
1131
1132 @item nocombreloc
1133 Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1134
1135 @item nocopyreloc
1136 Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1137 defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
1138
1139 @item nodefaultlib
1140 Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1141 ignore any default library search paths.
1142
1143 @item nodelete
1144 Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1145
1146 @item nodlopen
1147 Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1148
1149 @item nodump
1150 Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1151
1152 @item noexecstack
1153 Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1154
1155 @item text
1156 Treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1157
1158 @item notext
1159 Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1160
1161 @item textoff
1162 Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1163
1164 @item norelro
1165 Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1166
1167 @item now
1168 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1169 dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1170 when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1171 deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1172 first called.
1173
1174 @item origin
1175 Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1176
1177 @item relro
1178 Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1179
1180 @item max-page-size=@var{value}
1181 Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1182
1183 @item common-page-size=@var{value}
1184 Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1185
1186 @item stack-size=@var{value}
1187 Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1188 Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1189 @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1190
1191 @item bndplt
1192 Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1193
1194 @item noextern-protected-data
1195 Don't treat protected data symbol as external when building shared
1196 library. This option overrides linker backend default. It can be used
1197 to workaround incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1198 generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
1199 module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
1200 i386 and x86-64.
1201
1202 @end table
1203
1204 Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
1205
1206 @kindex -(
1207 @cindex groups of archives
1208 @item -( @var{archives} -)
1209 @itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1210 The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1211 either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1212
1213 The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1214 references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1215 the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1216 archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1217 object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1218 would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1219 they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1220 resolved.
1221
1222 Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1223 it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1224 more archives.
1225
1226 @kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1227 @kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1228 @item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1229 @itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1230 Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
1231 recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
1232 and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1233 the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1234 behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1235 so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1236 restore the old behaviour.
1237
1238 @kindex --as-needed
1239 @kindex --no-as-needed
1240 @item --as-needed
1241 @itemx --no-as-needed
1242 This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
1243 on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
1244 the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1245 on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
1246 needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
1247 emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1248 non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1249 the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1250 non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
1251 Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1252 the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1253 needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1254 from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1255
1256 @kindex --add-needed
1257 @kindex --no-add-needed
1258 @item --add-needed
1259 @itemx --no-add-needed
1260 These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1261 their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1262 options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1263 and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1264
1265 @kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1266 @item -assert @var{keyword}
1267 This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1268
1269 @kindex -Bdynamic
1270 @kindex -dy
1271 @kindex -call_shared
1272 @item -Bdynamic
1273 @itemx -dy
1274 @itemx -call_shared
1275 Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1276 for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1277 default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1278 for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1279 multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
1280 @option{-l} options which follow it.
1281
1282 @kindex -Bgroup
1283 @item -Bgroup
1284 Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1285 section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1286 object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
1287 @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1288 only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
1289
1290 @kindex -Bstatic
1291 @kindex -dn
1292 @kindex -non_shared
1293 @kindex -static
1294 @item -Bstatic
1295 @itemx -dn
1296 @itemx -non_shared
1297 @itemx -static
1298 Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1299 platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1300 variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1301 may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
1302 library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
1303 option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1304 option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1305 shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1306 references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
1307 libraries.
1308
1309 @kindex -Bsymbolic
1310 @item -Bsymbolic
1311 When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1312 definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1313 for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1314 within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1315 platforms which support shared libraries.
1316
1317 @kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1318 @item -Bsymbolic-functions
1319 When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
1320 symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
1321 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1322 libraries.
1323
1324 @kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1325 @item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1326 Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1327 typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1328 global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1329 within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1330 to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1331 in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1332 which support shared libraries.
1333
1334 The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1335 scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1336
1337 @kindex --dynamic-list-data
1338 @item --dynamic-list-data
1339 Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1340
1341 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1342 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1343 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1344 is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1345
1346 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1347 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1348 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1349
1350 @kindex --check-sections
1351 @kindex --no-check-sections
1352 @item --check-sections
1353 @itemx --no-check-sections
1354 Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
1355 been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
1356 perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1357 suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1358 allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
1359 restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
1360 Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1361 force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1362 option.
1363
1364 @kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1365 @kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1366 @item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1367 @itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1368 This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
1369 by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
1370 command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
1371 output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
1372 input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1373 specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
1374 follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1375 behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1376
1377 This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
1378 libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1379 mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1380 their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1381 required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1382 the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1383 dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
1384 symbols.
1385
1386 @cindex cross reference table
1387 @kindex --cref
1388 @item --cref
1389 Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1390 generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1391 Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1392
1393 The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1394 easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1395 sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1396 symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1397 definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1398 where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1399 symbol are listed.
1400
1401 @cindex common allocation
1402 @kindex --no-define-common
1403 @item --no-define-common
1404 This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1405 The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1406 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1407
1408 The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1409 the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1410 of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1411 forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1412 Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1413 from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1414 This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1415 and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1416 duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1417 paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1418
1419 @cindex symbols, from command line
1420 @kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1421 @item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
1422 Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1423 address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1424 times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1425 limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1426 context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1427 symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1428 constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1429 using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1430 @emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1431 equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
1432
1433 @cindex demangling, from command line
1434 @kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
1435 @kindex --no-demangle
1436 @item --demangle[=@var{style}]
1437 @itemx --no-demangle
1438 These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1439 and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1440 present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1441 underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
1442 mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1443 different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1444 to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
1445 demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1446 is set. These options may be used to override the default.
1447
1448 @cindex dynamic linker, from command line
1449 @kindex -I@var{file}
1450 @kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1451 @item -I@var{file}
1452 @itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1453 Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1454 generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1455 linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1456 doing.
1457
1458 @kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1459 @item --no-dynamic-linker
1460 When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1461 linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1462 executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1463 entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1464
1465 @kindex --fatal-warnings
1466 @kindex --no-fatal-warnings
1467 @item --fatal-warnings
1468 @itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1469 Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1470 with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
1471
1472 @kindex --force-exe-suffix
1473 @item --force-exe-suffix
1474 Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1475
1476 If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1477 @code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1478 the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1479 option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1480 Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1481 it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1482
1483 @kindex --gc-sections
1484 @kindex --no-gc-sections
1485 @cindex garbage collection
1486 @item --gc-sections
1487 @itemx --no-gc-sections
1488 Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
1489 targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
1490 performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1491 @samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1492 collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1493 implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
1494
1495 @samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1496 examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1497 symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1498 command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1499 referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1500 libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1501 referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1502 the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1503 relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1504
1505 This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1506 @samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
1507 specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1508 a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1509
1510 @kindex --print-gc-sections
1511 @kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1512 @cindex garbage collection
1513 @item --print-gc-sections
1514 @itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1515 List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1516 printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1517 collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1518 default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1519 be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1520 line.
1521
1522 @kindex --print-output-format
1523 @cindex output format
1524 @item --print-output-format
1525 Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1526 other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1527 in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1528
1529 @kindex --print-memory-usage
1530 @cindex memory usage
1531 @item --print-memory-usage
1532 Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1533 the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1534 quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1535 headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1536 parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1537
1538 @smallexample
1539 Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1540 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1541 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1542 @end smallexample
1543
1544 @cindex help
1545 @cindex usage
1546 @kindex --help
1547 @item --help
1548 Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1549
1550 @kindex --target-help
1551 @item --target-help
1552 Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1553
1554 @kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1555 @item -Map=@var{mapfile}
1556 Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
1557 @option{-M} option, above.
1558
1559 @cindex memory usage
1560 @kindex --no-keep-memory
1561 @item --no-keep-memory
1562 @command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1563 symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
1564 instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
1565 necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
1566 while linking a large executable.
1567
1568 @kindex --no-undefined
1569 @kindex -z defs
1570 @item --no-undefined
1571 @itemx -z defs
1572 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1573 is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1574 The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1575 behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
1576 libraries being linked in.
1577
1578 @kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1579 @kindex -z muldefs
1580 @item --allow-multiple-definition
1581 @itemx -z muldefs
1582 Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1583 report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1584 first definition will be used.
1585
1586 @kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
1587 @kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1588 @item --allow-shlib-undefined
1589 @itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1590 Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
1591 This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1592 determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1593 shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1594 how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1595
1596 The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1597 referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1598 an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1599 a shared library.
1600
1601 The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1602 libraries specified at link time are that:
1603
1604 @itemize @bullet
1605 @item
1606 A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1607 that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1608 resolvable at load time.
1609 @item
1610 There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1611 symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1612
1613 The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1614 select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1615 architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1616 appropriate memset function.
1617 @end itemize
1618
1619 @kindex --no-undefined-version
1620 @item --no-undefined-version
1621 Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1622 it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1623 will be issued instead.
1624
1625 @kindex --default-symver
1626 @item --default-symver
1627 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1628 exported symbols.
1629
1630 @kindex --default-imported-symver
1631 @item --default-imported-symver
1632 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1633 imported symbols.
1634
1635 @kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1636 @item --no-warn-mismatch
1637 Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
1638 files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1639 been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
1640 This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
1641 errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1642 have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1643 inappropriate.
1644
1645 @kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1646 @item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1647 Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1648 library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1649
1650 @kindex --no-whole-archive
1651 @item --no-whole-archive
1652 Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
1653 archive files.
1654
1655 @cindex output file after errors
1656 @kindex --noinhibit-exec
1657 @item --noinhibit-exec
1658 Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1659 Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1660 errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1661 when it issues any error whatsoever.
1662
1663 @kindex -nostdlib
1664 @item -nostdlib
1665 Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1666 command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1667 (including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1668
1669 @ifclear SingleFormat
1670 @kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1671 @item --oformat=@var{output-format}
1672 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1673 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
1674 @samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
1675 object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1676 object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
1677 should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1678 usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1679 name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1680 list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1681 command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1682 this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1683 @end ifclear
1684
1685 @kindex -pie
1686 @kindex --pic-executable
1687 @item -pie
1688 @itemx --pic-executable
1689 @cindex position independent executables
1690 Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1691 ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1692 libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
1693 address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
1694 normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1695 defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1696
1697 @kindex -qmagic
1698 @item -qmagic
1699 This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1700
1701 @kindex -Qy
1702 @item -Qy
1703 This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1704
1705 @kindex --relax
1706 @cindex synthesizing linker
1707 @cindex relaxing addressing modes
1708 @cindex --no-relax
1709 @item --relax
1710 @itemx --no-relax
1711 An option with machine dependent effects.
1712 @ifset GENERIC
1713 This option is only supported on a few targets.
1714 @end ifset
1715 @ifset H8300
1716 @xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
1717 @end ifset
1718 @ifset I960
1719 @xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
1720 @end ifset
1721 @ifset XTENSA
1722 @xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1723 @end ifset
1724 @ifset M68HC11
1725 @xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1726 @end ifset
1727 @ifset NIOSII
1728 @xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1729 @end ifset
1730 @ifset POWERPC
1731 @xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1732 @end ifset
1733
1734 On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1735 global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1736 addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1737 synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
1738 instructions, and combining constant values.
1739
1740 On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1741 debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1742 @ifset GENERIC
1743 This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1744 family of processors.
1745 @end ifset
1746
1747 @ifset GENERIC
1748 On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1749 but ignored.
1750 @end ifset
1751
1752 On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1753 @samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1754
1755 @cindex retaining specified symbols
1756 @cindex stripping all but some symbols
1757 @cindex symbols, retaining selectively
1758 @kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1759 @item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1760 Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1761 discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1762 symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1763 @ifset GENERIC
1764 (such as VxWorks)
1765 @end ifset
1766 where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1767 run-time memory.
1768
1769 @samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1770 or symbols needed for relocations.
1771
1772 You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1773 line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1774
1775 @ifset GENERIC
1776 @item -rpath=@var{dir}
1777 @cindex runtime library search path
1778 @kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
1779 Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
1780 linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
1781 arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
1782 them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
1783 also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1784 objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
1785 @option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
1786 ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1787 @code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1788
1789 The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
1790 SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
1791 @option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1792 runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1793 options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1794 gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
1795 file systems.
1796
1797 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
1798 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
1799 the @option{-rpath} option.
1800 @end ifset
1801
1802 @ifset GENERIC
1803 @cindex link-time runtime library search path
1804 @kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1805 @item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1806 When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1807 happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1808 of the input files.
1809
1810 When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1811 non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1812 shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
1813 explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
1814 specifies the first set of directories to search. The
1815 @option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
1816 either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1817 appearing multiple times.
1818
1819 This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1820 that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1821 is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1822 runtime linker would do.
1823
1824 The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
1825 libraries:
1826 @enumerate
1827 @item
1828 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
1829 @item
1830 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1831 between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1832 specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1833 used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
1834 at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1835 by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1836 the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
1837 @item
1838 On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1839 @option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1840 environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
1841 @item
1842 On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1843 directories specified using @option{-L} options.
1844 @item
1845 For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
1846 variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
1847 @item
1848 For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1849 @code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1850 libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1851 @code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1852 @item
1853 The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1854 @item
1855 For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1856 exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1857 @end enumerate
1858
1859 If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1860 warning and continue with the link.
1861 @end ifset
1862
1863 @kindex -shared
1864 @kindex -Bshareable
1865 @item -shared
1866 @itemx -Bshareable
1867 @cindex shared libraries
1868 Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1869 and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
1870 shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
1871 undefined symbols in the link.
1872
1873 @kindex --sort-common
1874 @item --sort-common
1875 @itemx --sort-common=ascending
1876 @itemx --sort-common=descending
1877 This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1878 ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1879 sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1880 eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1881 between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1882 specified, then descending order is assumed.
1883
1884 @kindex --sort-section=name
1885 @item --sort-section=name
1886 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1887 patterns in the linker script.
1888
1889 @kindex --sort-section=alignment
1890 @item --sort-section=alignment
1891 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1892 patterns in the linker script.
1893
1894 @kindex --split-by-file
1895 @item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
1896 Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
1897 each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1898 size of 1 if not given.
1899
1900 @kindex --split-by-reloc
1901 @item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
1902 Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
1903 output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
1904 This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
1905 certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1906 cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1907 that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1908 support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1909 input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1910 more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
1911 many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
1912
1913 @kindex --stats
1914 @item --stats
1915 Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1916 as execution time and memory usage.
1917
1918 @kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
1919 @item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1920 Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1921 configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1922 that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1923
1924 @kindex --traditional-format
1925 @cindex traditional format
1926 @item --traditional-format
1927 For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1928 the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
1929 use the traditional format instead.
1930
1931 @cindex dbx
1932 For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
1933 symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1934 full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1935 @code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
1936 trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
1937 combine duplicate entries.
1938
1939 @kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1940 @item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1941 Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1942 address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1943 times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1944 line.
1945 @var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1946 for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1947 @samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1948 should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1949 sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1950
1951 @kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1952 @kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1953 @kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
1954 @cindex segment origins, cmd line
1955 @item -Tbss=@var{org}
1956 @itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1957 @itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1958 Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
1959 @code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
1960
1961 @kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1962 @item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1963 @cindex text segment origin, cmd line
1964 When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
1965 byte of the text segment.
1966
1967 @kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1968 @item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1969 @cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
1970 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
1971 the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
1972 text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
1973
1974 @kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1975 @item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1976 @cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
1977 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
1978 model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
1979
1980 @kindex --unresolved-symbols
1981 @item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1982 Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1983 values for @samp{method}:
1984
1985 @table @samp
1986 @item ignore-all
1987 Do not report any unresolved symbols.
1988
1989 @item report-all
1990 Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
1991
1992 @item ignore-in-object-files
1993 Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1994 ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1995
1996 @item ignore-in-shared-libs
1997 Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1998 ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1999 when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2000 libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2001 command line.
2002 @end table
2003
2004 The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2005 by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2006
2007 Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2008 unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2009 can change this to a warning.
2010
2011 @kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2012 @cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2013 @item --dll-verbose
2014 @itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2015 Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
2016 supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
2017 the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2018 argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
2019
2020 @kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2021 @cindex version script, symbol versions
2022 @item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2023 Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2024 used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
2025 about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
2026 is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2027 see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2028 use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2029 symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2030 @xref{WIN32}.
2031
2032 @kindex --warn-common
2033 @cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2034 @cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2035 @item --warn-common
2036 Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
2037 a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
2038 but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2039 you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
2040 Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
2041 warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2042
2043 There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2044
2045 @table @samp
2046 @item int i = 1;
2047 A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2048 file.
2049
2050 @item extern int i;
2051 An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2052 There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2053 variable somewhere.
2054
2055 @item int i;
2056 A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2057 variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2058 The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2059 single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2060 size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2061 a definition of the same variable.
2062 @end table
2063
2064 The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2065 Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2066 just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2067 encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2068 a common symbol.
2069
2070 @enumerate
2071 @item
2072 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2073 definition for the symbol.
2074 @smallexample
2075 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2076 overridden by definition
2077 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2078 @end smallexample
2079
2080 @item
2081 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2082 the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2083 except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2084 @smallexample
2085 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2086 overriding common
2087 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2088 @end smallexample
2089
2090 @item
2091 Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2092 @smallexample
2093 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2094 of `@var{symbol}'
2095 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2096 @end smallexample
2097
2098 @item
2099 Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2100 @smallexample
2101 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2102 overridden by larger common
2103 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2104 @end smallexample
2105
2106 @item
2107 Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2108 the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2109 encountered in a different order.
2110 @smallexample
2111 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2112 overriding smaller common
2113 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2114 @end smallexample
2115 @end enumerate
2116
2117 @kindex --warn-constructors
2118 @item --warn-constructors
2119 Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2120 object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2121 detect the use of global constructors.
2122
2123 @kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2124 @item --warn-multiple-gp
2125 Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2126 This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2127 Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2128 section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2129 of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2130 base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2131 base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2132 bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2133 large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2134 values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2135 option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2136
2137 @kindex --warn-once
2138 @cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2139 @cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2140 @item --warn-once
2141 Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2142 which refers to it.
2143
2144 @kindex --warn-section-align
2145 @cindex warnings, on section alignment
2146 @cindex section alignment, warnings on
2147 @item --warn-section-align
2148 Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2149 alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2150 The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2151 is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2152 the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2153
2154 @kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2155 @item --warn-shared-textrel
2156 Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
2157
2158 @kindex --warn-alternate-em
2159 @item --warn-alternate-em
2160 Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2161
2162 @kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2163 @item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2164 If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2165 @option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2166 This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2167
2168 @kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2169 @item --error-unresolved-symbols
2170 This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2171 it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2172
2173 @kindex --whole-archive
2174 @cindex including an entire archive
2175 @item --whole-archive
2176 For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
2177 @option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
2178 in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2179 files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2180 library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2181 library. This option may be used more than once.
2182
2183 Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
2184 about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2185 Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
2186 list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2187 your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2188
2189 @kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2190 @item --wrap=@var{symbol}
2191 Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2192 @var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2193 undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2194 @var{symbol}.
2195
2196 This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2197 wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2198 wishes to call the system function, it should call
2199 @code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2200
2201 Here is a trivial example:
2202
2203 @smallexample
2204 void *
2205 __wrap_malloc (size_t c)
2206 @{
2207 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
2208 return __real_malloc (c);
2209 @}
2210 @end smallexample
2211
2212 If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
2213 all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2214 instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2215 call the real @code{malloc} function.
2216
2217 You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
2218 links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
2219 you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2220 file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2221 call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2222
2223 @kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2224 @item --eh-frame-hdr
2225 Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2226 @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2227
2228 @kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2229 @item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2230 Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2231 generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2232 if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2233
2234 @kindex --enable-new-dtags
2235 @kindex --disable-new-dtags
2236 @item --enable-new-dtags
2237 @itemx --disable-new-dtags
2238 This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2239 systems may not understand them. If you specify
2240 @option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2241 and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
2242 If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
2243 created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2244 those options are only available for ELF systems.
2245
2246 @kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
2247 @item --hash-size=@var{number}
2248 Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2249 close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2250 time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2251 increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2252 value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2253
2254 @kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2255 @item --hash-style=@var{style}
2256 Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2257 @code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2258 new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2259 the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2260 hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2261
2262 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2263 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2264 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2265 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2266 @item --compress-debug-sections=none
2267 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2268 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2269 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2270 On ELF platforms , these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2271 compressed using zlib. @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't
2272 compress DWARF debug sections.
2273 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses DWARF debug
2274 sections and rename debug section names to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2275 instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib}
2276 and @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2277 compress DWARF debug sections with SHF_COMPRESSED from the ELF ABI.
2278 The default behaviour varies depending upon the target involved and
2279 the configure options used to build the toolchain. The default can be
2280 determined by examing the output from the linker's @option{--help} option.
2281
2282 @kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2283 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
2284 This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
2285 linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
2286 for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2287 about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2288
2289 Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2290 1021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
2291 run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2292 has been used.
2293
2294 The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2295 enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
2296
2297 @kindex --build-id
2298 @kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2299 @item --build-id
2300 @itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2301 Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
2302 or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
2303 unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2304 @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2305 @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2306 @code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2307 the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2308 string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2309 @code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2310 is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2311
2312 The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2313 that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2314 unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2315 to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2316 file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2317 string identifying the original linked file does not change.
2318
2319 Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2320 @code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
2321 @end table
2322
2323 @c man end
2324
2325 @subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
2326
2327 @c man begin OPTIONS
2328
2329 The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
2330 the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2331 normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2332 use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2333 @code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2334 like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2335 symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2336 object file).
2337
2338 In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2339 support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2340 PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2341 values by either a space or an equals sign.
2342
2343 @table @gcctabopt
2344
2345 @kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2346 @item --add-stdcall-alias
2347 If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2348 as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
2349 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2350
2351 @kindex --base-file
2352 @item --base-file @var{file}
2353 Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2354 addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2355 @file{dlltool}.
2356 [This is an i386 PE specific option]
2357
2358 @kindex --dll
2359 @item --dll
2360 Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
2361 @option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
2362 file.
2363 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2364
2365 @kindex --enable-long-section-names
2366 @kindex --disable-long-section-names
2367 @item --enable-long-section-names
2368 @itemx --disable-long-section-names
2369 The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
2370 the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2371 for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2372 fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
2373 to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2374 allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2375 disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2376 generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2377 as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
2378 with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2379 GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2380 information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2381 option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2382 section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2383 when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2384 image and not stripping symbols.
2385 [This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2386
2387 @kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2388 @kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2389 @item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2390 @itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2391 If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
2392 do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
2393 only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2394 resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2395 undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2396 @code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2397 to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2398 warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2399 import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
2400 to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
2401 feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
2402 @option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
2403 mismatches are considered to be errors.
2404 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2405
2406 @kindex --leading-underscore
2407 @kindex --no-leading-underscore
2408 @item --leading-underscore
2409 @itemx --no-leading-underscore
2410 For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2411 in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2412 disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2413
2414 @cindex DLLs, creating
2415 @kindex --export-all-symbols
2416 @item --export-all-symbols
2417 If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2418 be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2419 otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2420 explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2421 attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2422 option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
2423 @code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
2424 @code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
2425 exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2426 re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2427 such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2428 @code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
2429 @code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2430 Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2431 not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
2432 extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
2433 (obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
2434 These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2435 @code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2436 @code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
2437 @code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
2438 @code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
2439 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2440
2441 @kindex --exclude-symbols
2442 @item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
2443 Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2444 exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
2445 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2446
2447 @kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2448 @item --exclude-all-symbols
2449 Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2450 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2451
2452 @kindex --file-alignment
2453 @item --file-alignment
2454 Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2455 file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2456 512.
2457 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2458
2459 @cindex heap size
2460 @kindex --heap
2461 @item --heap @var{reserve}
2462 @itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2463 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2464 to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
2465 committed.
2466 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2467
2468 @cindex image base
2469 @kindex --image-base
2470 @item --image-base @var{value}
2471 Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2472 the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2473 is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2474 your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2475 other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2476 for dlls.
2477 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2478
2479 @kindex --kill-at
2480 @item --kill-at
2481 If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2482 symbols before they are exported.
2483 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2484
2485 @kindex --large-address-aware
2486 @item --large-address-aware
2487 If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
2488 header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
2489 greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
2490 or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2491 section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2492 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2493
2494 @kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2495 @item --disable-large-address-aware
2496 Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2497 This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2498 driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2499 addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2500 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2501
2502 @kindex --major-image-version
2503 @item --major-image-version @var{value}
2504 Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
2505 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2506
2507 @kindex --major-os-version
2508 @item --major-os-version @var{value}
2509 Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
2510 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2511
2512 @kindex --major-subsystem-version
2513 @item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
2514 Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
2515 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2516
2517 @kindex --minor-image-version
2518 @item --minor-image-version @var{value}
2519 Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
2520 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2521
2522 @kindex --minor-os-version
2523 @item --minor-os-version @var{value}
2524 Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
2525 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2526
2527 @kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2528 @item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
2529 Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
2530 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2531
2532 @cindex DEF files, creating
2533 @cindex DLLs, creating
2534 @kindex --output-def
2535 @item --output-def @var{file}
2536 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2537 file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2538 (which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2539 library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2540 automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
2541 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2542
2543 @cindex DLLs, creating
2544 @kindex --out-implib
2545 @item --out-implib @var{file}
2546 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2547 import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2548 import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
2549 may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
2550 makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2551 creation step.
2552 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2553
2554 @kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2555 @item --enable-auto-image-base
2556 @itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2557 Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2558 @var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2559 By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2560 for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2561 execution are avoided.
2562 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2563
2564 @kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2565 @item --disable-auto-image-base
2566 Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2567 user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2568 default.
2569 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2570
2571 @cindex DLLs, linking to
2572 @kindex --dll-search-prefix
2573 @item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
2574 When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
2575 search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
2576 @code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
2577 between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2578 uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
2579 @code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
2580 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2581
2582 @kindex --enable-auto-import
2583 @item --enable-auto-import
2584 Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2585 DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
2586 building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2587 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2588 to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2589 specification published by Microsoft.
2590
2591 Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2592 data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2593 placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2594 around a problem with consts that is described here:
2595 http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2596
2597 Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2598 see this message:
2599
2600 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
2601 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2602
2603 This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2604 ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
2605 allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2606 fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2607 constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2608 multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2609 this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2610 of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2611 the warning, and exit.
2612
2613 There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2614 data type of the exported variable:
2615
2616 One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2617 of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
2618 this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2619
2620 A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2621 that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2622 there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
2623 a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2624
2625 @example
2626 extern type extern_array[];
2627 extern_array[1] -->
2628 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2629 @end example
2630
2631 or
2632
2633 @example
2634 extern type extern_array[];
2635 extern_array[1] -->
2636 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2637 @end example
2638
2639 For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2640 is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
2641
2642 @example
2643 extern struct s extern_struct;
2644 extern_struct.field -->
2645 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2646 @end example
2647
2648 or
2649
2650 @example
2651 extern long long extern_ll;
2652 extern_ll -->
2653 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2654 @end example
2655
2656 A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
2657 'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
2658 @code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
2659 requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
2660 building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2661 merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2662 between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
2663 constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2664
2665 Original:
2666 @example
2667 --foo.h
2668 extern int arr[];
2669 --foo.c
2670 #include "foo.h"
2671 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2672 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2673 @}
2674 @end example
2675
2676 Solution 1:
2677 @example
2678 --foo.h
2679 extern int arr[];
2680 --foo.c
2681 #include "foo.h"
2682 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2683 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2684 volatile int *parr = arr;
2685 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2686 @}
2687 @end example
2688
2689 Solution 2:
2690 @example
2691 --foo.h
2692 /* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2693 #if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2694 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2695 #define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2696 #else
2697 #define FOO_IMPORT
2698 #endif
2699 extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2700 --foo.c
2701 #include "foo.h"
2702 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2703 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2704 @}
2705 @end example
2706
2707 A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
2708 library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2709 for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2710 functions).
2711 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2712
2713 @kindex --disable-auto-import
2714 @item --disable-auto-import
2715 Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
2716 @code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
2717 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2718
2719 @kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2720 @item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2721 If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2722 that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2723 a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
2724 environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
2725 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2726
2727 @kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2728 @item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2729 Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2730 DLLs.
2731 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2732
2733 @kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2734 @item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2735 Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
2736 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2737
2738 @kindex --section-alignment
2739 @item --section-alignment
2740 Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2741 addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
2742 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2743
2744 @cindex stack size
2745 @kindex --stack
2746 @item --stack @var{reserve}
2747 @itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2748 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2749 to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
2750 committed.
2751 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2752
2753 @kindex --subsystem
2754 @item --subsystem @var{which}
2755 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2756 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2757 Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2758 legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
2759 @code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2760 the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2761 @var{which}.
2762 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2763
2764 The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2765 of the PE file header:
2766 [These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2767
2768 @kindex --high-entropy-va
2769 @item --high-entropy-va
2770 Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2771 (ASLR).
2772
2773 @kindex --dynamicbase
2774 @item --dynamicbase
2775 The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2776 randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2777 Vista for i386 PE targets.
2778
2779 @kindex --forceinteg
2780 @item --forceinteg
2781 Code integrity checks are enforced.
2782
2783 @kindex --nxcompat
2784 @item --nxcompat
2785 The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2786 This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2787
2788 @kindex --no-isolation
2789 @item --no-isolation
2790 Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2791
2792 @kindex --no-seh
2793 @item --no-seh
2794 The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2795 this image.
2796
2797 @kindex --no-bind
2798 @item --no-bind
2799 Do not bind this image.
2800
2801 @kindex --wdmdriver
2802 @item --wdmdriver
2803 The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
2804
2805 @kindex --tsaware
2806 @item --tsaware
2807 The image is Terminal Server aware.
2808
2809 @kindex --insert-timestamp
2810 @item --insert-timestamp
2811 @itemx --no-insert-timestamp
2812 Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
2813 as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
2814 other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
2815 will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
2816 same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
2817 can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
2818 that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
2819 identically.
2820 @end table
2821
2822 @c man end
2823
2824 @ifset C6X
2825 @subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2826
2827 @c man begin OPTIONS
2828
2829 The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2830 libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2831 all executables use an index of 0.
2832
2833 @table @gcctabopt
2834
2835 @kindex --dsbt-size
2836 @item --dsbt-size @var{size}
2837 This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
2838 or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2839 entries.
2840
2841 @kindex --dsbt-index
2842 @item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2843 This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2844 to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2845 executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2846 @code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2847
2848 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2849 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2850 exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2851
2852 @end table
2853
2854 @c man end
2855 @end ifset
2856
2857 @ifset M68HC11
2858 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2859
2860 @c man begin OPTIONS
2861
2862 The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2863 memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2864
2865 @table @gcctabopt
2866
2867 @kindex --no-trampoline
2868 @item --no-trampoline
2869 This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2870 is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2871 instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2872
2873 @kindex --bank-window
2874 @item --bank-window @var{name}
2875 This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2876 the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2877 The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2878 paging and addresses within the memory window.
2879
2880 @end table
2881
2882 @c man end
2883 @end ifset
2884
2885 @ifset M68K
2886 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2887
2888 @c man begin OPTIONS
2889
2890 The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2891 when linking for 68K targets.
2892
2893 @table @gcctabopt
2894
2895 @kindex --got
2896 @item --got=@var{type}
2897 This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2898 @var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2899 @samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2900 Info entry for @file{ld}.
2901
2902 @end table
2903
2904 @c man end
2905 @end ifset
2906
2907 @ifset MIPS
2908 @subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
2909
2910 @c man begin OPTIONS
2911
2912 The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
2913 generation when linking for MIPS targets.
2914
2915 @table @gcctabopt
2916
2917 @kindex --insn32
2918 @item --insn32
2919 @kindex --no-insn32
2920 @itemx --no-insn32
2921 These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
2922 generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
2923 or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
2924 32-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
2925 used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
2926 possible.
2927
2928 @end table
2929
2930 @c man end
2931 @end ifset
2932
2933 @ifset UsesEnvVars
2934 @node Environment
2935 @section Environment Variables
2936
2937 @c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2938
2939 You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
2940 @ifclear SingleFormat
2941 @code{GNUTARGET},
2942 @end ifclear
2943 @code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
2944
2945 @ifclear SingleFormat
2946 @kindex GNUTARGET
2947 @cindex default input format
2948 @code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2949 use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2950 of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
2951 @code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
2952 of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2953 attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2954 this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2955 there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2956 object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2957 BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2958 in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
2959 @end ifclear
2960
2961 @kindex LDEMULATION
2962 @cindex default emulation
2963 @cindex emulation, default
2964 @code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2965 @samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2966 behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2967 available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2968 the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2969 variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2970 linker was configured.
2971
2972 @kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2973 @cindex demangling, default
2974 Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2975 @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2976 default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2977 a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2978 may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2979 options.
2980
2981 @c man end
2982 @end ifset
2983
2984 @node Scripts
2985 @chapter Linker Scripts
2986
2987 @cindex scripts
2988 @cindex linker scripts
2989 @cindex command files
2990 Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2991 written in the linker command language.
2992
2993 The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2994 the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2995 the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2996 more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2997 direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2998 described below.
2999
3000 The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3001 yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
3002 linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
3003 to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
3004 such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3005
3006 You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3007 line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3008 default linker script.
3009
3010 You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3011 to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3012 Linker Scripts}.
3013
3014 @menu
3015 * Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3016 * Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3017 * Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3018 * Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3019 * Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3020 * SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3021 * MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3022 * PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3023 * VERSION:: VERSION Command
3024 * Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3025 * Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3026 @end menu
3027
3028 @node Basic Script Concepts
3029 @section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3030 @cindex linker script concepts
3031 We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3032 describe the linker script language.
3033
3034 The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3035 file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3036 @dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3037 The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3038 purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3039 among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3040 section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3041 in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3042
3043 Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3044 also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
3045 contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
3046 the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3047 A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3048 area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3049 loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3050 which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3051 of debugging information.
3052
3053 Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3054 first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3055 the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3056 @dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3057 section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3058 same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3059 is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3060 (this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3061 based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3062 RAM address would be the VMA.
3063
3064 You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3065 program with the @samp{-h} option.
3066
3067 Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3068 @dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3069 has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3070 information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3071 will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3072 static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3073 referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3074
3075 You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3076 program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3077 option.
3078
3079 @node Script Format
3080 @section Linker Script Format
3081 @cindex linker script format
3082 Linker scripts are text files.
3083
3084 You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3085 either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3086 symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3087 generally ignored.
3088
3089 Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3090 If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3091 otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3092 double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3093 file name.
3094
3095 You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3096 @samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3097 to whitespace.
3098
3099 @node Simple Example
3100 @section Simple Linker Script Example
3101 @cindex linker script example
3102 @cindex example of linker script
3103 Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3104
3105 The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3106 @samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3107 memory layout of the output file.
3108
3109 The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3110 describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3111 code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3112 @samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3113 Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3114 your input files.
3115
3116 For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
3117 0x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3118 linker script which will do that:
3119 @smallexample
3120 SECTIONS
3121 @{
3122 . = 0x10000;
3123 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3124 . = 0x8000000;
3125 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3126 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3127 @}
3128 @end smallexample
3129
3130 You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3131 followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3132 descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3133
3134 The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3135 sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3136 counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3137 other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3138 current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3139 incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3140 @samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3141
3142 The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3143 required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3144 after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3145 which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3146 wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3147 means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3148
3149 Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3150 @samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3151 @samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3152
3153 The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3154 the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3155 at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3156 output section, the value of the location counter will be
3157 @samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3158 effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
3159 immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
3160
3161 The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3162 alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3163 example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3164 sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3165 may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3166 sections.
3167
3168 That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3169
3170 @node Simple Commands
3171 @section Simple Linker Script Commands
3172 @cindex linker script simple commands
3173 In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3174
3175 @menu
3176 * Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3177 * File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3178 @ifclear SingleFormat
3179 * Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3180 @end ifclear
3181
3182 * REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
3183 * Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3184 @end menu
3185
3186 @node Entry Point
3187 @subsection Setting the Entry Point
3188 @kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3189 @cindex start of execution
3190 @cindex first instruction
3191 @cindex entry point
3192 The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3193 point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3194 entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3195 @smallexample
3196 ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3197 @end smallexample
3198
3199 There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3200 entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3201 stopping when one of them succeeds:
3202 @itemize @bullet
3203 @item
3204 the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
3205 @item
3206 the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
3207 @item
3208 the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3209 targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3210 check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
3211 @item
3212 the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
3213 @item
3214 The address @code{0}.
3215 @end itemize
3216
3217 @node File Commands
3218 @subsection Commands Dealing with Files
3219 @cindex linker script file commands
3220 Several linker script commands deal with files.
3221
3222 @table @code
3223 @item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3224 @kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3225 @cindex including a linker script
3226 Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3227 be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
3228 with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
3229 10 levels deep.
3230
3231 You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3232 @code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3233
3234 @item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3235 @itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3236 @kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3237 @cindex input files in linker scripts
3238 @cindex input object files in linker scripts
3239 @cindex linker script input object files
3240 The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3241 in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3242
3243 For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3244 a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3245 then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3246
3247 In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3248 script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3249
3250 In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3251 with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3252 located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3253 for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3254 open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
3255 linker will search through the archive library search path.
3256 The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3257 as the first character in the filename path. See also the
3258 description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3259
3260 If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
3261 name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3262 @samp{-l}.
3263
3264 When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3265 files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3266 script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3267
3268 @item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3269 @itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3270 @kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3271 @cindex grouping input files
3272 The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3273 files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3274 new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3275 in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3276
3277 @item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3278 @itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3279 @kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3280 This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3281 commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3282 as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3283 with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3284 when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3285 @option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3286 and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3287 setting afterwards.
3288
3289 @item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3290 @kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3291 @cindex output file name in linker script
3292 The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3293 @code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3294 @samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3295 Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3296 precedence.
3297
3298 You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3299 output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3300
3301 @item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3302 @kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3303 @cindex library search path in linker script
3304 @cindex archive search path in linker script
3305 @cindex search path in linker script
3306 The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
3307 @command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
3308 @code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3309 on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3310 are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3311 the command line option are searched first.
3312
3313 @item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3314 @kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3315 @cindex first input file
3316 The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3317 that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3318 though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3319 when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3320 first file.
3321 @end table
3322
3323 @ifclear SingleFormat
3324 @node Format Commands
3325 @subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
3326 A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3327
3328 @table @code
3329 @item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3330 @itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3331 @kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3332 @cindex output file format in linker script
3333 The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3334 output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
3335 exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3336 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3337 line option takes precedence.
3338
3339 You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3340 formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3341 This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3342 desired endianness.
3343
3344 If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3345 will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3346 output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3347 used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3348
3349 For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3350 command:
3351 @smallexample
3352 OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3353 @end smallexample
3354 This says that the default format for the output file is
3355 @samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3356 option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3357 format.
3358
3359 @item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3360 @kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3361 @cindex input file format in linker script
3362 The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3363 files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3364 This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3365 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3366 is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3367 command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3368 @end table
3369 @end ifclear
3370
3371 @node REGION_ALIAS
3372 @subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3373 @kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3374 @cindex region alias
3375 @cindex region names
3376
3377 Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3378 @ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3379
3380 @smallexample
3381 REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3382 @end smallexample
3383
3384 The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3385 memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3386 to memory regions. An example follows.
3387
3388 Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3389 memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3390 that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3391 non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3392 access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3393 read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3394 sections:
3395
3396 @itemize @bullet
3397 @item
3398 @code{.text} program code;
3399 @item
3400 @code{.rodata} read-only data;
3401 @item
3402 @code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3403 @item
3404 @code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3405 @end itemize
3406
3407 The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3408 part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3409 output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3410 systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3411 @code{C}:
3412 @multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3413 @item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3414 @item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3415 @item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3416 @item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3417 @item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3418 @end multitable
3419 The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3420 loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3421 the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3422 the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3423
3424 The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3425 includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3426 memory layout:
3427 @smallexample
3428 INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3429
3430 SECTIONS
3431 @{
3432 .text :
3433 @{
3434 *(.text)
3435 @} > REGION_TEXT
3436 .rodata :
3437 @{
3438 *(.rodata)
3439 rodata_end = .;
3440 @} > REGION_RODATA
3441 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3442 @{
3443 data_start = .;
3444 *(.data)
3445 @} > REGION_DATA
3446 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3447 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3448 .bss :
3449 @{
3450 *(.bss)
3451 @} > REGION_BSS
3452 @}
3453 @end smallexample
3454
3455 Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3456 regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3457 variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3458 @table @code
3459 @item A
3460 Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3461 @smallexample
3462 MEMORY
3463 @{
3464 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3465 @}
3466
3467 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3468 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3469 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3470 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3471 @end smallexample
3472 @item B
3473 Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3474 into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3475 @code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3476 @smallexample
3477 MEMORY
3478 @{
3479 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3480 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3481 @}
3482
3483 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3484 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3485 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3486 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3487 @end smallexample
3488 @item C
3489 Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3490 @code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3491 initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3492 system start into the @code{RAM}.
3493 @smallexample
3494 MEMORY
3495 @{
3496 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3497 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3498 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3499 @}
3500
3501 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3502 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3503 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3504 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3505 @end smallexample
3506 @end table
3507
3508 It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3509 @code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3510 necessary:
3511 @smallexample
3512 #include <string.h>
3513
3514 extern char data_start [];
3515 extern char data_size [];
3516 extern char data_load_start [];
3517
3518 void copy_data(void)
3519 @{
3520 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3521 @{
3522 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3523 @}
3524 @}
3525 @end smallexample
3526
3527 @node Miscellaneous Commands
3528 @subsection Other Linker Script Commands
3529 There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3530
3531 @table @code
3532 @item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3533 @kindex ASSERT
3534 @cindex assertion in linker script
3535 Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3536 with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3537
3538 Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3539 take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3540 inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3541 for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3542 symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3543
3544 @smallexample
3545 .stack :
3546 @{
3547 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3548 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3549 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3550 @}
3551 @end smallexample
3552
3553 will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3554 PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3555 can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3556
3557 @smallexample
3558 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3559 .stack :
3560 @{
3561 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3562 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3563 @}
3564 @end smallexample
3565
3566 will work.
3567
3568 @item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3569 @kindex EXTERN
3570 @cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3571 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3572 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3573 modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3574 each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3575 command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3576
3577 @item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3578 @kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3579 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3580 This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
3581 to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
3582 output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3583
3584 @item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3585 @kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3586 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3587 This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3588 command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3589 to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3590
3591 @item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3592 @kindex INSERT
3593 @cindex insert user script into default script
3594 This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3595 augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3596 inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3597 @var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3598 default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3599 sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3600 linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3601 insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3602 linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3603 default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3604 of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3605 to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3606 is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3607
3608 @smallexample
3609 SECTIONS
3610 @{
3611 OVERLAY :
3612 @{
3613 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3614 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3615 @}
3616 @}
3617 INSERT AFTER .text;
3618 @end smallexample
3619
3620 @item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3621 @kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3622 @cindex cross references
3623 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3624 references among certain output sections.
3625
3626 In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3627 using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3628 will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3629 errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3630 a function defined in the other section.
3631
3632 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
3633 @command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
3634 an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3635 @code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3636 names.
3637
3638 @ifclear SingleFormat
3639 @item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3640 @kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3641 @cindex machine architecture
3642 @cindex architecture
3643 Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3644 of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3645 architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3646 the @samp{-f} option.
3647 @end ifclear
3648
3649 @item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3650 @kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3651 This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3652 @var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3653 in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3654 @xref{Expression Section}.
3655 @end table
3656
3657 @node Assignments
3658 @section Assigning Values to Symbols
3659 @cindex assignment in scripts
3660 @cindex symbol definition, scripts
3661 @cindex variables, defining
3662 You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
3663 the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
3664
3665 @menu
3666 * Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3667 * HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
3668 * PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
3669 * PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3670 * Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
3671 @end menu
3672
3673 @node Simple Assignments
3674 @subsection Simple Assignments
3675
3676 You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3677
3678 @table @code
3679 @item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3680 @itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3681 @itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3682 @itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3683 @itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3684 @itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3685 @itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3686 @itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3687 @itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3688 @end table
3689
3690 The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3691 @var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3692 defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3693
3694 The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
3695 may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
3696
3697 The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3698
3699 Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3700
3701 You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3702 statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3703 section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3704
3705 The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3706 expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3707
3708 Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3709 assignments may be used:
3710
3711 @smallexample
3712 floating_point = 0;
3713 SECTIONS
3714 @{
3715 .text :
3716 @{
3717 *(.text)
3718 _etext = .;
3719 @}
3720 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
3721 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3722 @}
3723 @end smallexample
3724 @noindent
3725 In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3726 zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3727 the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3728 defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3729 upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3730
3731 @node HIDDEN
3732 @subsection HIDDEN
3733 @cindex HIDDEN
3734 For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3735 exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3736
3737 Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3738 @code{HIDDEN}:
3739
3740 @smallexample
3741 HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3742 SECTIONS
3743 @{
3744 .text :
3745 @{
3746 *(.text)
3747 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3748 @}
3749 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3750 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3751 @}
3752 @end smallexample
3753 @noindent
3754 In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3755
3756 @node PROVIDE
3757 @subsection PROVIDE
3758 @cindex PROVIDE
3759 In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3760 only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3761 the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3762 @samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3763 @samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3764 @code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3765 @samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3766 @code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3767
3768 Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3769 @smallexample
3770 SECTIONS
3771 @{
3772 .text :
3773 @{
3774 *(.text)
3775 _etext = .;
3776 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3777 @}
3778 @}
3779 @end smallexample
3780
3781 In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3782 underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3783 the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3784 underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3785 If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3786 linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3787
3788 @node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3789 @subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3790 @cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3791 Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3792 hidden and won't be exported.
3793
3794 @node Source Code Reference
3795 @subsection Source Code Reference
3796
3797 Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3798 intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3799 a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3800 symbol that does not have a value.
3801
3802 Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3803 transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3804 stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3805 prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3806 mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3807 of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3808 variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3809 linker script variable might be referred to as:
3810
3811 @smallexample
3812 extern int foo;
3813 @end smallexample
3814
3815 But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3816
3817 @smallexample
3818 _foo = 1000;
3819 @end smallexample
3820
3821 In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3822 transformation has taken place.
3823
3824 When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3825 things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3826 in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3827 second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3828 table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3829 contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3830 value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3831
3832 @smallexample
3833 int foo = 1000;
3834 @end smallexample
3835
3836 creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
3837 holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3838 number 1000 is initially stored.
3839
3840 When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3841 first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3842 memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3843 So:
3844
3845 @smallexample
3846 foo = 1;
3847 @end smallexample
3848
3849 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3850 associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3851 address. Whereas:
3852
3853 @smallexample
3854 int * a = & foo;
3855 @end smallexample
3856
3857 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
3858 and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3859 the variable @samp{a}.
3860
3861 Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3862 the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3863 an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3864
3865 @smallexample
3866 foo = 1000;
3867 @end smallexample
3868
3869 creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3870 the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3871 address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3872 linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3873 access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3874
3875 Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3876 you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3877 use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3878 section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3879 linker script contains these declarations:
3880
3881 @smallexample
3882 @group
3883 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3884 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
3885 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3886 @end group
3887 @end smallexample
3888
3889 Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3890
3891 @smallexample
3892 @group
3893 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
3894
3895 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3896 @end group
3897 @end smallexample
3898
3899 Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3900 Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
3901 arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
3902
3903 @smallexample
3904 @group
3905 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
3906
3907 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
3908 @end group
3909 @end smallexample
3910
3911 Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
3912 operators.
3913
3914 @node SECTIONS
3915 @section SECTIONS Command
3916 @kindex SECTIONS
3917 The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3918 into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3919
3920 The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3921 @smallexample
3922 SECTIONS
3923 @{
3924 @var{sections-command}
3925 @var{sections-command}
3926 @dots{}
3927 @}
3928 @end smallexample
3929
3930 Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3931
3932 @itemize @bullet
3933 @item
3934 an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3935 @item
3936 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3937 @item
3938 an output section description
3939 @item
3940 an overlay description
3941 @end itemize
3942
3943 The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3944 @code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3945 those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3946 understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3947 the layout of the output file.
3948
3949 Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3950 below.
3951
3952 If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3953 linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3954 section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3955 input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3956 example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3957 in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3958
3959 @menu
3960 * Output Section Description:: Output section description
3961 * Output Section Name:: Output section name
3962 * Output Section Address:: Output section address
3963 * Input Section:: Input section description
3964 * Output Section Data:: Output section data
3965 * Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3966 * Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3967 * Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3968 * Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3969 @end menu
3970
3971 @node Output Section Description
3972 @subsection Output Section Description
3973 The full description of an output section looks like this:
3974 @smallexample
3975 @group
3976 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
3977 [AT(@var{lma})]
3978 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
3979 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
3980 [@var{constraint}]
3981 @{
3982 @var{output-section-command}
3983 @var{output-section-command}
3984 @dots{}
3985 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
3986 @end group
3987 @end smallexample
3988
3989 Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3990
3991 The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3992 name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
3993 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
3994 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
3995 The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3996
3997 Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3998
3999 @itemize @bullet
4000 @item
4001 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4002 @item
4003 an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4004 @item
4005 data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4006 @item
4007 a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4008 @end itemize
4009
4010 @node Output Section Name
4011 @subsection Output Section Name
4012 @cindex name, section
4013 @cindex section name
4014 The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4015 meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4016 support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4017 must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4018 example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4019 output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4020 names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4021 quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4022 characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4023 commas must be quoted.
4024
4025 The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4026 Discarding}.
4027
4028 @node Output Section Address
4029 @subsection Output Section Address
4030 @cindex address, section
4031 @cindex section address
4032 The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
4033 address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4034 is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4035
4036 If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4037 section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4038 to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4039 alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4040 contained within the output section.
4041
4042 The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4043
4044 @itemize @bullet
4045 @item
4046 If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4047 is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4048 in that region.
4049
4050 @item
4051 If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4052 regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4053 section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4054 be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4055
4056 @item
4057 If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4058 the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4059 counter.
4060 @end itemize
4061
4062 @noindent
4063 For example:
4064
4065 @smallexample
4066 .text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4067 @end smallexample
4068
4069 @noindent
4070 and
4071
4072 @smallexample
4073 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4074 @end smallexample
4075
4076 @noindent
4077 are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4078 @samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4079 counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
4080 counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4081 input sections.
4082
4083 The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4084 For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4085 so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4086 do something like this:
4087 @smallexample
4088 .text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4089 @end smallexample
4090 @noindent
4091 This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4092 aligned upward to the specified value.
4093
4094 Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
4095 location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4096 sections are ignored).
4097
4098 @node Input Section
4099 @subsection Input Section Description
4100 @cindex input sections
4101 @cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4102 The most common output section command is an input section description.
4103
4104 The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4105 You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4106 in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4107 map the input files into your memory layout.
4108
4109 @menu
4110 * Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4111 * Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4112 * Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4113 * Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4114 * Input Section Example:: Input section example
4115 @end menu
4116
4117 @node Input Section Basics
4118 @subsubsection Input Section Basics
4119 @cindex input section basics
4120 An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4121 by a list of section names in parentheses.
4122
4123 The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4124 describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4125
4126 The most common input section description is to include all input
4127 sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4128 include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4129 @smallexample
4130 *(.text)
4131 @end smallexample
4132 @noindent
4133 Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
4134 of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4135 match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4136 example:
4137 @smallexample
4138 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
4139 @end smallexample
4140 will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
4141 @file{otherfile.o} to be included.
4142
4143 There are two ways to include more than one section:
4144 @smallexample
4145 *(.text .rdata)
4146 *(.text) *(.rdata)
4147 @end smallexample
4148 @noindent
4149 The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4150 @samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
4151 first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4152 they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
4153 @samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4154 @samp{.rdata} input sections.
4155
4156 You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4157 You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4158 needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4159 @smallexample
4160 data.o(.data)
4161 @end smallexample
4162
4163 To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4164 of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4165
4166 Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4167
4168 @smallexample
4169 @group
4170 SECTIONS @{
4171 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4172 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4173 @}
4174 @end group
4175 @end smallexample
4176
4177 In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4178 input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4179 @code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4180 @samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4181 whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4182
4183 You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4184 matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4185 with no whitespace around the colon.
4186
4187 @table @samp
4188 @item archive:file
4189 matches file within archive
4190 @item archive:
4191 matches the whole archive
4192 @item :file
4193 matches file but not one in an archive
4194 @end table
4195
4196 Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4197 wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4198 single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4199 @samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4200 within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4201 also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4202 other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4203 from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4204 command.
4205
4206 If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4207 the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4208 commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4209 @smallexample
4210 data.o
4211 @end smallexample
4212
4213 When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4214 and does not contain any wild card
4215 characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4216 name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4217 did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4218 though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4219 @code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4220 the archive search path.
4221
4222 @node Input Section Wildcards
4223 @subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
4224 @cindex input section wildcards
4225 @cindex wildcard file name patterns
4226 @cindex file name wildcard patterns
4227 @cindex section name wildcard patterns
4228 In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4229 name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4230
4231 The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4232 pattern for the file name.
4233
4234 The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4235
4236 @table @samp
4237 @item *
4238 matches any number of characters
4239 @item ?
4240 matches any single character
4241 @item [@var{chars}]
4242 matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4243 character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4244 @samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4245 @item \
4246 quotes the following character
4247 @end table
4248
4249 When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4250 will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4251 Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4252 exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4253 @samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4254 a @samp{/} character.
4255
4256 File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4257 specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4258 does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4259
4260 If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4261 appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4262 will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4263 sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4264 @file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4265 @smallexample
4266 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4267 .data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4268 @end smallexample
4269
4270 @cindex SORT_BY_NAME
4271 Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4272 in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
4273 this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4274 pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4275 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
4276 into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4277
4278 @cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4279 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4280 difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
4281 descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
4282 Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4283 reduce the amount of padding necessary.
4284
4285 @cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4286 @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4287 difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4288 ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4289 encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4290
4291 @cindex SORT
4292 @code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4293
4294 When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4295 can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4296
4297 @enumerate
4298 @item
4299 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4300 It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
4301 sections have the same name.
4302 @item
4303 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4304 It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
4305 sections have the same alignment.
4306 @item
4307 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
4308 treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4309 @item
4310 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4311 is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4312 @item
4313 All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4314 @end enumerate
4315
4316 When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4317 section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4318 takes precedence over the command line option.
4319
4320 If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4321 command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4322 treated as nested sorting command.
4323
4324 @enumerate
4325 @item
4326 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4327 @option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4328 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4329 @item
4330 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4331 @option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4332 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4333 @end enumerate
4334
4335 If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4336 command line option will be ignored.
4337
4338 @cindex SORT_NONE
4339 @code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4340 section sorting option.
4341
4342 If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4343 @samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4344 precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4345
4346 This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4347 files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4348 sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4349 The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4350 with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4351 linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4352 @smallexample
4353 @group
4354 SECTIONS @{
4355 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4356 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4357 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4358 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4359 @}
4360 @end group
4361 @end smallexample
4362
4363 @node Input Section Common
4364 @subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
4365 @cindex common symbol placement
4366 @cindex uninitialized data placement
4367 A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4368 file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4369 linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4370 named @samp{COMMON}.
4371
4372 You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4373 other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4374 particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4375 input files are placed in another section.
4376
4377 In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4378 @samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4379 @smallexample
4380 .bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4381 @end smallexample
4382
4383 @cindex scommon section
4384 @cindex small common symbols
4385 Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4386 example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4387 symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4388 different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4389 the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4390 symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4391 to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4392 locations.
4393
4394 @cindex [COMMON]
4395 You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4396 notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4397 @samp{*(COMMON)}.
4398
4399 @node Input Section Keep
4400 @subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
4401 @cindex KEEP
4402 @cindex garbage collection
4403 When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
4404 it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
4405 This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4406 with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
4407 @code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
4408
4409 @node Input Section Example
4410 @subsubsection Input Section Example
4411 The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4412 to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4413 start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4414 @samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4415 follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4416 @samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4417 @samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4418 All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4419 files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4420
4421 @smallexample
4422 @group
4423 SECTIONS @{
4424 outputa 0x10000 :
4425 @{
4426 all.o
4427 foo.o (.input1)
4428 @}
4429 @end group
4430 @group
4431 outputb :
4432 @{
4433 foo.o (.input2)
4434 foo1.o (.input1)
4435 @}
4436 @end group
4437 @group
4438 outputc :
4439 @{
4440 *(.input1)
4441 *(.input2)
4442 @}
4443 @}
4444 @end group
4445 @end smallexample
4446
4447 @node Output Section Data
4448 @subsection Output Section Data
4449 @cindex data
4450 @cindex section data
4451 @cindex output section data
4452 @kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4453 @kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4454 @kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4455 @kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4456 @kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4457 You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4458 @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4459 an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4460 parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4461 value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4462 counter.
4463
4464 The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4465 store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4466 bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4467 stored.
4468
4469 For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4470 of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4471 @smallexample
4472 BYTE(1)
4473 LONG(addr)
4474 @end smallexample
4475
4476 When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4477 same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4478 target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4479 @code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4480 @code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4481
4482 If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4483 which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4484 When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4485 true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4486 endianness of the first input object file.
4487
4488 Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
4489 between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4490 @smallexample
4491 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4492 @end smallexample
4493 whereas this will work:
4494 @smallexample
4495 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4496 @end smallexample
4497
4498 @kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4499 @cindex holes, filling
4500 @cindex unspecified memory
4501 You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4502 current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4503 otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4504 gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
4505 with the value of the expression, repeated as
4506 necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4507 point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4508 than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4509 different parts of an output section.
4510
4511 This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
4512 value @samp{0x90}:
4513 @smallexample
4514 FILL(0x90909090)
4515 @end smallexample
4516
4517 The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
4518 section attribute, but it only affects the
4519 part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4520 entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
4521 precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
4522 expression.
4523
4524 @node Output Section Keywords
4525 @subsection Output Section Keywords
4526 There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4527 commands.
4528
4529 @table @code
4530 @kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4531 @cindex input filename symbols
4532 @cindex filename symbols
4533 @item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4534 The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4535 The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4536 file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4537 the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4538
4539 This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4540 normally used for any other object file format.
4541
4542 @kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4543 @cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4544 @cindex constructors, arranging in link
4545 @item CONSTRUCTORS
4546 When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4547 unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4548 destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4549 arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4550 automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4551 For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4552 linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4553 @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4554 ignored for other object file formats.
4555
4556 The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
4557 constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4558 Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4559 the start and end of the global destructors. The
4560 first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4561 of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4562 compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4563 formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4564 @code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4565 the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4566 destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4567 @code{exit}.
4568
4569 For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4570 arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4571 addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4572 and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4573 linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4574 runtime code expects to see.
4575
4576 @smallexample
4577 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4578 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4579 *(.ctors)
4580 LONG(0)
4581 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4582 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4583 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4584 *(.dtors)
4585 LONG(0)
4586 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4587 @end smallexample
4588
4589 If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4590 which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4591 are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4592 are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
4593 command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4594 @code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4595 @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
4596 @samp{*(.dtors)}.
4597
4598 Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4599 and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4600 need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4601 scripts.
4602
4603 @end table
4604
4605 @node Output Section Discarding
4606 @subsection Output Section Discarding
4607 @cindex discarding sections
4608 @cindex sections, discarding
4609 @cindex removing sections
4610 The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4611 This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4612 may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
4613 @smallexample
4614 .foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
4615 @end smallexample
4616 @noindent
4617 will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
4618 @samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4619 sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4620 space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4621 too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4622 space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4623 @samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4624 @samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4625 This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
4626
4627 The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
4628 on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4629 symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
4630 the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4631 section is discarded.
4632
4633 @cindex /DISCARD/
4634 The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4635 input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4636 section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4637
4638 @node Output Section Attributes
4639 @subsection Output Section Attributes
4640 @cindex output section attributes
4641 We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4642 like this:
4643
4644 @smallexample
4645 @group
4646 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4647 [AT(@var{lma})]
4648 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4649 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4650 [@var{constraint}]
4651 @{
4652 @var{output-section-command}
4653 @var{output-section-command}
4654 @dots{}
4655 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
4656 @end group
4657 @end smallexample
4658
4659 We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4660 @var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4661 remaining section attributes.
4662
4663 @menu
4664 * Output Section Type:: Output section type
4665 * Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
4666 * Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
4667 * Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
4668 * Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
4669 * Output Section Region:: Output section region
4670 * Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4671 * Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4672 @end menu
4673
4674 @node Output Section Type
4675 @subsubsection Output Section Type
4676 Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4677 parentheses. The following types are defined:
4678
4679 @table @code
4680 @item NOLOAD
4681 The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4682 loaded into memory when the program is run.
4683 @item DSECT
4684 @itemx COPY
4685 @itemx INFO
4686 @itemx OVERLAY
4687 These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4688 rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4689 marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4690 section when the program is run.
4691 @end table
4692
4693 @kindex NOLOAD
4694 @cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4695 @cindex loading, preventing
4696 The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4697 the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4698 the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4699 @samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
4700 need to be loaded when the program is run.
4701 @smallexample
4702 @group
4703 SECTIONS @{
4704 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4705 @dots{}
4706 @}
4707 @end group
4708 @end smallexample
4709
4710 @node Output Section LMA
4711 @subsubsection Output Section LMA
4712 @kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
4713 @kindex AT(@var{lma})
4714 @cindex load address
4715 @cindex section load address
4716 Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
4717 @ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4718 @pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4719 specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4720 address is optional.
4721
4722 The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4723 specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4724 takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4725 load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4726 region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
4727
4728 If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
4729 section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4730 load address:
4731
4732 @itemize @bullet
4733 @item
4734 If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4735 the LMA address as well.
4736
4737 @item
4738 If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4739
4740 @item
4741 Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4742 with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4743 section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4744 VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4745 the last section in the located region.
4746
4747 @item
4748 If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4749 that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4750
4751 @item
4752 If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4753 section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4754 @end itemize
4755
4756 @cindex ROM initialized data
4757 @cindex initialized data in ROM
4758 This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4759 example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4760 called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4761 @samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4762 even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4763 uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4764 defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4765 counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4766
4767 @smallexample
4768 @group
4769 SECTIONS
4770 @{
4771 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
4772 .mdata 0x2000 :
4773 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4774 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4775 .bss 0x3000 :
4776 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4777 @}
4778 @end group
4779 @end smallexample
4780
4781 The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4782 this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4783 the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4784 how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4785 script.
4786
4787 @smallexample
4788 @group
4789 extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4790 char *src = &_etext;
4791 char *dst = &_data;
4792
4793 /* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4794 while (dst < &_edata)
4795 *dst++ = *src++;
4796
4797 /* Zero bss. */
4798 for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4799 *dst = 0;
4800 @end group
4801 @end smallexample
4802
4803 @node Forced Output Alignment
4804 @subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4805 @kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4806 @cindex forcing output section alignment
4807 @cindex output section alignment
4808 You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
4809 alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
4810 intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
4811
4812 @node Forced Input Alignment
4813 @subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4814 @kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4815 @cindex forcing input section alignment
4816 @cindex input section alignment
4817 You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4818 SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4819 sections, whether larger or smaller.
4820
4821 @node Output Section Constraint
4822 @subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4823 @kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4824 @kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4825 @cindex constraints on output sections
4826 You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4827 of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4828 read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4829 @code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4830
4831 @node Output Section Region
4832 @subsubsection Output Section Region
4833 @kindex >@var{region}
4834 @cindex section, assigning to memory region
4835 @cindex memory regions and sections
4836 You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4837 using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4838
4839 Here is a simple example:
4840 @smallexample
4841 @group
4842 MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4843 SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4844 @end group
4845 @end smallexample
4846
4847 @node Output Section Phdr
4848 @subsubsection Output Section Phdr
4849 @kindex :@var{phdr}
4850 @cindex section, assigning to program header
4851 @cindex program headers and sections
4852 You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4853 using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4854 one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4855 assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4856 @code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4857 linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4858
4859 Here is a simple example:
4860 @smallexample
4861 @group
4862 PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4863 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4864 @end group
4865 @end smallexample
4866
4867 @node Output Section Fill
4868 @subsubsection Output Section Fill
4869 @kindex =@var{fillexp}
4870 @cindex section fill pattern
4871 @cindex fill pattern, entire section
4872 You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4873 @samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4874 (@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4875 within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
4876 alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4877 necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
4878 of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
4879 an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4880 fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
4881 other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
4882 pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4883 expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
4884
4885 You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
4886 output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
4887
4888 Here is a simple example:
4889 @smallexample
4890 @group
4891 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
4892 @end group
4893 @end smallexample
4894
4895 @node Overlay Description
4896 @subsection Overlay Description
4897 @kindex OVERLAY
4898 @cindex overlays
4899 An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4900 are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4901 the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4902 copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4903 required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4904 can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4905 than another.
4906
4907 Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4908 @code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4909 output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4910 command is as follows:
4911 @smallexample
4912 @group
4913 OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4914 @{
4915 @var{secname1}
4916 @{
4917 @var{output-section-command}
4918 @var{output-section-command}
4919 @dots{}
4920 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4921 @var{secname2}
4922 @{
4923 @var{output-section-command}
4924 @var{output-section-command}
4925 @dots{}
4926 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4927 @dots{}
4928 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
4929 @end group
4930 @end smallexample
4931
4932 Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4933 section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4934 section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
4935 those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
4936 except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4937 sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4938
4939 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
4940 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
4941
4942 The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4943 addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4944 memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4945 whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4946 and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4947 and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4948
4949 If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
4950 references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
4951 the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
4952 sense for one section to refer directly to another.
4953 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
4954
4955 For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
4956 provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
4957 defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4958 @code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4959 the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4960 within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4961 symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4962
4963 At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4964 the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4965
4966 Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4967 @code{SECTIONS} construct.
4968 @smallexample
4969 @group
4970 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4971 @{
4972 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4973 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4974 @}
4975 @end group
4976 @end smallexample
4977 @noindent
4978 This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4979 address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4980 @samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
4981 following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
4982 @code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4983 @code{__load_stop_text1}.
4984
4985 C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4986 like the following.
4987
4988 @smallexample
4989 @group
4990 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4991 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4992 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4993 @end group
4994 @end smallexample
4995
4996 Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4997 everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4998 example could have been written identically as follows.
4999
5000 @smallexample
5001 @group
5002 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5003 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5004 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
5005 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5006 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5007 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
5008 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5009 @end group
5010 @end smallexample
5011
5012 @node MEMORY
5013 @section MEMORY Command
5014 @kindex MEMORY
5015 @cindex memory regions
5016 @cindex regions of memory
5017 @cindex allocating memory
5018 @cindex discontinuous memory
5019 The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5020 memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5021
5022 The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5023 memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5024 may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5025 can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5026 set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5027 regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5028 around to fit into the available regions.
5029
5030 A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5031 however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5032 specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5033 @code{MEMORY} is:
5034 @smallexample
5035 @group
5036 MEMORY
5037 @{
5038 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5039 @dots{}
5040 @}
5041 @end group
5042 @end smallexample
5043
5044 The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5045 region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5046 Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5047 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
5048 must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5049 add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
5050 command.
5051
5052 @cindex memory region attributes
5053 The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5054 whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5055 not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5056 @ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5057 section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5058 the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5059 them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5060
5061 The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5062 @table @samp
5063 @item R
5064 Read-only section
5065 @item W
5066 Read/write section
5067 @item X
5068 Executable section
5069 @item A
5070 Allocatable section
5071 @item I
5072 Initialized section
5073 @item L
5074 Same as @samp{I}
5075 @item !
5076 Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
5077 @end table
5078
5079 If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5080 @samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
5081 attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
5082 in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
5083 attributes.
5084
5085 @kindex ORIGIN =
5086 @kindex o =
5087 @kindex org =
5088 The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5089 the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5090 cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5091 abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5092 @code{ORG}).
5093
5094 @kindex LENGTH =
5095 @kindex len =
5096 @kindex l =
5097 The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5098 region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
5099 be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5100 @code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
5101
5102 In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5103 available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5104 and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5105 linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5106 is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5107 or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5108 explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5109 region.
5110
5111 @smallexample
5112 @group
5113 MEMORY
5114 @{
5115 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5116 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5117 @}
5118 @end group
5119 @end smallexample
5120
5121 Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5122 specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5123 @samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5124 a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5125 output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5126 was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5127 the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5128 output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5129 region, the linker will issue an error message.
5130
5131 It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
5132 expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
5133 @code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5134
5135 @smallexample
5136 @group
5137 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
5138 @end group
5139 @end smallexample
5140
5141 @node PHDRS
5142 @section PHDRS Command
5143 @kindex PHDRS
5144 @cindex program headers
5145 @cindex ELF program headers
5146 @cindex program segments
5147 @cindex segments, ELF
5148 The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5149 @dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5150 loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5151 program with the @samp{-p} option.
5152
5153 When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5154 reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5155 program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5156 This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5157 interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5158
5159 The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5160 in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5161 precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5162 the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5163 not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5164
5165 The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5166 generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5167 ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5168
5169 This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5170 @code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5171
5172 @smallexample
5173 @group
5174 PHDRS
5175 @{
5176 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5177 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5178 @}
5179 @end group
5180 @end smallexample
5181
5182 The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5183 of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5184 header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5185 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5186 must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5187 is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
5188
5189 Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5190 system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5191 specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5192 sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5193 attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5194 Section Phdr}.
5195
5196 It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5197 merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5198 repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5199 contain the section.
5200
5201 If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5202 then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5203 not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5204 convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5205 placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5206 default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5207 segment at all.
5208
5209 @kindex FILEHDR
5210 @kindex PHDRS
5211 You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
5212 the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5213 The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5214 file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5215 include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
5216 segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5217 these keywords.
5218
5219 The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5220 value of the keyword.
5221
5222 @table @asis
5223 @item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5224 Indicates an unused program header.
5225
5226 @item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5227 Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5228 the file.
5229
5230 @item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5231 Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5232
5233 @item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5234 Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5235 found.
5236
5237 @item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5238 Indicates a segment holding note information.
5239
5240 @item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5241 A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5242 ABI.
5243
5244 @item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5245 Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5246
5247 @item @var{expression}
5248 An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5249 be used for types not defined above.
5250 @end table
5251
5252 You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5253 in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5254 @code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5255 Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5256 output section attribute.
5257
5258 The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5259 which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5260 explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5261 an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5262 header.
5263
5264 Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5265 headers used on a native ELF system.
5266
5267 @example
5268 @group
5269 PHDRS
5270 @{
5271 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5272 interp PT_INTERP ;
5273 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5274 data PT_LOAD ;
5275 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5276 @}
5277
5278 SECTIONS
5279 @{
5280 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5281 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5282 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5283 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5284 @dots{}
5285 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5286 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5287 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5288 @dots{}
5289 @}
5290 @end group
5291 @end example
5292
5293 @node VERSION
5294 @section VERSION Command
5295 @kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5296 @cindex symbol versions
5297 @cindex version script
5298 @cindex versions of symbols
5299 The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5300 only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5301 symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5302 a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5303 shared library.
5304
5305 You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5306 you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5307 also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5308
5309 The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5310 @smallexample
5311 VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5312 @end smallexample
5313
5314 The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5315 Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5316 version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5317 version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5318 version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5319 scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5320 library.
5321
5322 The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5323 examples.
5324
5325 @smallexample
5326 VERS_1.1 @{
5327 global:
5328 foo1;
5329 local:
5330 old*;
5331 original*;
5332 new*;
5333 @};
5334
5335 VERS_1.2 @{
5336 foo2;
5337 @} VERS_1.1;
5338
5339 VERS_2.0 @{
5340 bar1; bar2;
5341 extern "C++" @{
5342 ns::*;
5343 "f(int, double)";
5344 @};
5345 @} VERS_1.2;
5346 @end smallexample
5347
5348 This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5349 version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5350 The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5351 a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
5352 of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5353 symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5354 is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5355 in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
5356 However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5357 name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
5358
5359 Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5360 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5361 to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5362
5363 Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5364 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5365 and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5366
5367 When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5368 specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5369 unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
5370 unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
5371 somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5372 wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5373 wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5374 set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5375 ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
5376
5377 The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5378 they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5379 could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5380 However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5381
5382 Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
5383 in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5384 symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5385 won't.
5386
5387 @smallexample
5388 @{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
5389 @end smallexample
5390
5391 When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5392 symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5393 requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5394 shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5395 loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5396 linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5397 application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5398 way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5399 all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5400 search for each symbol reference.
5401
5402 The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5403 doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5404 that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5405 functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5406 the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5407 required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5408 that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5409 versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5410 the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5411
5412 There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5413 first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5414 source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5415 script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5416 maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5417 @smallexample
5418 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5419 @end smallexample
5420 @noindent
5421 in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5422 be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5423 The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
5424 @samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5425 takes precedence over a version script.
5426
5427 The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5428 function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5429 an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5430 version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5431 linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5432
5433 To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5434 source file. Here is an example:
5435
5436 @smallexample
5437 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5438 __asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5439 __asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5440 __asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5441 @end smallexample
5442
5443 In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5444 unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5445 example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5446 @samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5447
5448 When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5449 some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5450 this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5451 @samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5452 declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5453 you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5454
5455 If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5456 within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
5457 (i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
5458 specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5459
5460 You can also specify the language in the version script:
5461
5462 @smallexample
5463 VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5464 @end smallexample
5465
5466 The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
5467 The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5468 demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
5469 patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5470 @samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
5471
5472 Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5473 described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5474 or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5475 the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5476 whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5477 cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5478 might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5479 should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5480 expect when you upgrade.
5481
5482 @node Expressions
5483 @section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5484 @cindex expressions
5485 @cindex arithmetic
5486 The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5487 that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5488 expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5489 host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5490
5491 You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5492
5493 The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5494 expressions.
5495
5496 @menu
5497 * Constants:: Constants
5498 * Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
5499 * Symbols:: Symbol Names
5500 * Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
5501 * Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5502 * Operators:: Operators
5503 * Evaluation:: Evaluation
5504 * Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5505 * Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5506 @end menu
5507
5508 @node Constants
5509 @subsection Constants
5510 @cindex integer notation
5511 @cindex constants in linker scripts
5512 All constants are integers.
5513
5514 As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5515 octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
5516 hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
5517 @samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
5518 @samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5519 value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
5520
5521 @cindex scaled integers
5522 @cindex K and M integer suffixes
5523 @cindex M and K integer suffixes
5524 @cindex suffixes for integers
5525 @cindex integer suffixes
5526 In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5527 constant by
5528 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5529 @ifnottex
5530 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5531 @code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5532 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5533 @end ifnottex
5534 @tex
5535 ${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5536 @end tex
5537 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5538 respectively. For example, the following
5539 all refer to the same quantity:
5540
5541 @smallexample
5542 _fourk_1 = 4K;
5543 _fourk_2 = 4096;
5544 _fourk_3 = 0x1000;
5545 _fourk_4 = 10000o;
5546 @end smallexample
5547
5548 Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5549 conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5550
5551 @node Symbolic Constants
5552 @subsection Symbolic Constants
5553 @cindex symbolic constants
5554 @kindex CONSTANT
5555 It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5556 the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5557
5558 @table @code
5559 @item MAXPAGESIZE
5560 @kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5561 The target's maximum page size.
5562
5563 @item COMMONPAGESIZE
5564 @kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5565 The target's default page size.
5566 @end table
5567
5568 So for example:
5569
5570 @smallexample
5571 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
5572 @end smallexample
5573
5574 will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5575 supported by the target.
5576
5577 @node Symbols
5578 @subsection Symbol Names
5579 @cindex symbol names
5580 @cindex names
5581 @cindex quoted symbol names
5582 @kindex "
5583 Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5584 and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5585 Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5586 specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5587 keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5588 @smallexample
5589 "SECTION" = 9;
5590 "with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
5591 @end smallexample
5592
5593 Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5594 to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5595 whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5596
5597 @node Orphan Sections
5598 @subsection Orphan Sections
5599 @cindex orphan
5600 Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5601 are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5602 script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5603 output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5604 placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5605 attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5606 same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5607 If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5608 at the end of the file.
5609
5610 For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5611 well as section flag.
5612
5613 The command line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
5614 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}) can be used to control which
5615 output sections an orphan is placed in.
5616
5617 If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
5618 the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
5619 __start_SECNAME and __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
5620 section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5621 orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5622 representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5623 character.
5624
5625 @node Location Counter
5626 @subsection The Location Counter
5627 @kindex .
5628 @cindex dot
5629 @cindex location counter
5630 @cindex current output location
5631 The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5632 current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5633 location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5634 within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5635 anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5636
5637 @cindex holes
5638 Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5639 moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
5640 location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5641 and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5642 doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
5643
5644 @smallexample
5645 SECTIONS
5646 @{
5647 output :
5648 @{
5649 file1(.text)
5650 . = . + 1000;
5651 file2(.text)
5652 . += 1000;
5653 file3(.text)
5654 @} = 0x12345678;
5655 @}
5656 @end smallexample
5657 @noindent
5658 In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5659 located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5660 followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5661 @file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
5662 @samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
5663 specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5664
5665 @cindex dot inside sections
5666 Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5667 current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
5668 statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5669 absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5670 however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5671 not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5672
5673 @smallexample
5674 SECTIONS
5675 @{
5676 . = 0x100
5677 .text: @{
5678 *(.text)
5679 . = 0x200
5680 @}
5681 . = 0x500
5682 .data: @{
5683 *(.data)
5684 . += 0x600
5685 @}
5686 @}
5687 @end smallexample
5688
5689 The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5690 and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5691 the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5692 much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5693 move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5694 and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5695 the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5696 the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5697
5698 @cindex dot outside sections
5699 Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5700 output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5701 needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5702
5703 @smallexample
5704 SECTIONS
5705 @{
5706 start_of_text = . ;
5707 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5708 end_of_text = . ;
5709
5710 start_of_data = . ;
5711 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5712 end_of_data = . ;
5713 @}
5714 @end smallexample
5715
5716 If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5717 not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5718 between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5719 should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5720 blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5721 the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5722 sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5723 statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5724 special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5725 place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5726 as follows:
5727
5728 @smallexample
5729 SECTIONS
5730 @{
5731 start_of_text = . ;
5732 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5733 end_of_text = . ;
5734
5735 start_of_data = . ;
5736 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5737 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5738 end_of_data = . ;
5739 @}
5740 @end smallexample
5741
5742 This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5743 @code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5744 placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5745 assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5746 a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5747 section. So you could write:
5748
5749 @smallexample
5750 SECTIONS
5751 @{
5752 start_of_text = . ;
5753 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5754 end_of_text = . ;
5755
5756 . = . ;
5757 start_of_data = . ;
5758 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5759 end_of_data = . ;
5760 @}
5761 @end smallexample
5762
5763 Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5764 @code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5765
5766 @need 2000
5767 @node Operators
5768 @subsection Operators
5769 @cindex operators for arithmetic
5770 @cindex arithmetic operators
5771 @cindex precedence in expressions
5772 The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5773 the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5774 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5775 @ifnottex
5776 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5777 @smallexample
5778 precedence associativity Operators Notes
5779 (highest)
5780 1 left ! - ~ (1)
5781 2 left * / %
5782 3 left + -
5783 4 left >> <<
5784 5 left == != > < <= >=
5785 6 left &
5786 7 left |
5787 8 left &&
5788 9 left ||
5789 10 right ? :
5790 11 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5791 (lowest)
5792 @end smallexample
5793 Notes:
5794 (1) Prefix operators
5795 (2) @xref{Assignments}.
5796 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5797 @end ifnottex
5798 @tex
5799 \vskip \baselineskip
5800 %"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5801 \hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5802 \hrule
5803 \halign
5804 {\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5805 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5806 &Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5807 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5808 \noalign{\hrule}
5809 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5810 &highest&&&&&\cr
5811 % '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
5812 &1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
5813 &2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5814 &3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5815 &4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5816 &5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5817 &6&&left&&\&&\cr
5818 &7&&left&&|&\cr
5819 &8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5820 &9&&left&&||&\cr
5821 &10&&right&&? :&\cr
5822 &11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5823 &lowest&&&&&\cr
5824 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5825 \hrule}
5826 @end tex
5827 @iftex
5828 {
5829 @obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5830 @dag@quad Prefix operators.
5831 @ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5832 }
5833 @end iftex
5834 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5835
5836 @node Evaluation
5837 @subsection Evaluation
5838 @cindex lazy evaluation
5839 @cindex expression evaluation order
5840 The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5841 an expression when absolutely necessary.
5842
5843 The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5844 address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5845 regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5846 as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5847
5848 However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5849 until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5850 other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5851 for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5852
5853 The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5854 assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5855 allocation.
5856
5857 Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5858 @samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5859
5860 If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5861 available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5862 following
5863 @smallexample
5864 @group
5865 SECTIONS
5866 @{
5867 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
5868 @{ *(.text) @}
5869 @}
5870 @end group
5871 @end smallexample
5872 @noindent
5873 will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5874 address}.
5875
5876 @node Expression Section
5877 @subsection The Section of an Expression
5878 @cindex expression sections
5879 @cindex absolute expressions
5880 @cindex relative expressions
5881 @cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5882 @cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5883 @cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
5884 Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
5885 relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
5886 using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
5887 value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
5888 symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
5889 operations.
5890
5891 Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
5892 section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
5893 address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
5894 @code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
5895 functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
5896 One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
5897 (@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5898 differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
5899 versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
5900 section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
5901 Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
5902 absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
5903 given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
5904 everywhere.
5905
5906 In the following simple example,
5907
5908 @smallexample
5909 @group
5910 SECTIONS
5911 @{
5912 . = 0x100;
5913 __executable_start = 0x100;
5914 .data :
5915 @{
5916 . = 0x10;
5917 __data_start = 0x10;
5918 *(.data)
5919 @}
5920 @dots{}
5921 @}
5922 @end group
5923 @end smallexample
5924
5925 both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
5926 address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
5927 @code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
5928 section in the second two assignments.
5929
5930 For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
5931 addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
5932
5933 @itemize @bullet
5934 @item
5935 Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
5936 operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
5937 absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
5938 @item
5939 Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
5940 relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
5941 and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
5942 @item
5943 Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
5944 in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
5945 address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
5946 before applying the operator.
5947 @end itemize
5948
5949 The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
5950
5951 @itemize @bullet
5952 @item
5953 An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
5954 @item
5955 The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
5956 @item
5957 The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
5958 relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
5959 (after above conversions) is also a number.
5960 @item
5961 The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
5962 relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
5963 section as the relative operand(s).
5964 @item
5965 The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
5966 conversions) is an absolute address.
5967 @end itemize
5968
5969 You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5970 to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5971 create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5972 section @samp{.data}:
5973 @smallexample
5974 SECTIONS
5975 @{
5976 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5977 @}
5978 @end smallexample
5979 @noindent
5980 If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5981 @samp{.data} section.
5982
5983 Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
5984 particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
5985
5986 @node Builtin Functions
5987 @subsection Builtin Functions
5988 @cindex functions in expressions
5989 The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5990 use in linker script expressions.
5991
5992 @table @code
5993 @item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5994 @kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5995 @cindex expression, absolute
5996 Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5997 of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5998 value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5999 normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6000
6001 @item ADDR(@var{section})
6002 @kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6003 @cindex section address in expression
6004 Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
6005 script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
6006 the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6007 @code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6008 @code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6009 the other two will be absolute:
6010 @smallexample
6011 @group
6012 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6013 .output1 :
6014 @{
6015 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6016 @dots{}
6017 @}
6018 .output :
6019 @{
6020 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6021 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6022 @}
6023 @dots{} @}
6024 @end group
6025 @end smallexample
6026
6027 @item ALIGN(@var{align})
6028 @itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6029 @kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6030 @kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6031 @cindex round up location counter
6032 @cindex align location counter
6033 @cindex round up expression
6034 @cindex align expression
6035 Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6036 to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6037 doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6038 arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6039 expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
6040 equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
6041
6042 Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6043 next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6044 variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6045 input sections:
6046 @smallexample
6047 @group
6048 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6049 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6050 *(.data)
6051 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6052 @}
6053 @dots{} @}
6054 @end group
6055 @end smallexample
6056 @noindent
6057 The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6058 a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6059 a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6060 of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6061
6062 The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6063
6064 @item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6065 @kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6066 @cindex section alignment
6067 Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6068 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6069 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6070 the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6071 value in that section.
6072 @smallexample
6073 @group
6074 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6075 .output @{
6076 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6077 @dots{}
6078 @}
6079 @dots{} @}
6080 @end group
6081 @end smallexample
6082
6083 @item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6084 @kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6085 This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6086 scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6087 section.
6088
6089 @item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6090 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6091 This is equivalent to either
6092 @smallexample
6093 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6094 @end smallexample
6095 or
6096 @smallexample
6097 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
6098 @end smallexample
6099 @noindent
6100 depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6101 for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6102 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6103 If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6104 memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6105 bytes in the on-disk file.
6106
6107 This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6108 any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6109 @var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
6110 be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
6111 working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
6112
6113 @noindent
6114 Example:
6115 @smallexample
6116 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6117 @end smallexample
6118
6119 @item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6120 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6121 This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6122 evaluation purposes.
6123
6124 @smallexample
6125 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6126 @end smallexample
6127
6128 @item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6129 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6130 This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
6131 @samp{-z relro} option is used.
6132 When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6133 does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
6134 @var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
6135 boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
6136 it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
6137 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6138 padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6139 section alignment.
6140
6141 @smallexample
6142 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6143 @end smallexample
6144
6145 @item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6146 @kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6147 @cindex symbol defaults
6148 Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
6149 defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6150 return 0. You can use this function to provide
6151 default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6152 shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6153 the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6154 existed, its value is preserved:
6155
6156 @smallexample
6157 @group
6158 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6159 .text : @{
6160 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6161 @dots{}
6162 @}
6163 @dots{}
6164 @}
6165 @end group
6166 @end smallexample
6167
6168 @item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6169 @kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6170 Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6171
6172 @item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6173 @kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6174 @cindex section load address in expression
6175 Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
6176 Section LMA}).
6177
6178 @item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6179 @kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6180 Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6181 @code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6182
6183 @kindex MAX
6184 @item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6185 Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6186
6187 @kindex MIN
6188 @item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6189 Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6190
6191 @item NEXT(@var{exp})
6192 @kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6193 @cindex unallocated address, next
6194 Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6195 This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6196 use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6197 output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6198
6199 @item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6200 @kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6201 Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6202
6203 @item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6204 @kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6205 Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
6206 value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6207 @samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6208 will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6209 can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
6210 ``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
6211 name.
6212
6213 @item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6214 @kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6215 @cindex section size
6216 Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6217 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6218 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6219 @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6220 @smallexample
6221 @group
6222 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6223 .output @{
6224 .start = . ;
6225 @dots{}
6226 .end = . ;
6227 @}
6228 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6229 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6230 @dots{} @}
6231 @end group
6232 @end smallexample
6233
6234 @item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6235 @itemx sizeof_headers
6236 @kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6237 @cindex header size
6238 Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6239 information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6240 this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6241 choose, to facilitate paging.
6242
6243 @cindex not enough room for program headers
6244 @cindex program headers, not enough room
6245 When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6246 @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6247 number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6248 addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6249 additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6250 room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6251 the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6252 script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6253 you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6254 command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6255 @end table
6256
6257 @node Implicit Linker Scripts
6258 @section Implicit Linker Scripts
6259 @cindex implicit linker scripts
6260 If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6261 an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6262 linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6263 linker will report an error.
6264
6265 An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6266
6267 Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6268 assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6269 commands.
6270
6271 Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6272 at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6273 read. This can affect archive searching.
6274
6275 @ifset GENERIC
6276 @node Machine Dependent
6277 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
6278
6279 @cindex machine dependencies
6280 @command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6281 sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
6282 functionality are not listed.
6283
6284 @menu
6285 @ifset H8300
6286 * H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6287 @end ifset
6288 @ifset I960
6289 * i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6290 @end ifset
6291 @ifset M68HC11
6292 * M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6293 @end ifset
6294 @ifset ARM
6295 * ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6296 @end ifset
6297 @ifset HPPA
6298 * HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6299 @end ifset
6300 @ifset M68K
6301 * M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6302 @end ifset
6303 @ifset MIPS
6304 * MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6305 @end ifset
6306 @ifset MMIX
6307 * MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
6308 @end ifset
6309 @ifset MSP430
6310 * MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
6311 @end ifset
6312 @ifset NDS32
6313 * NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6314 @end ifset
6315 @ifset NIOSII
6316 * Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6317 @end ifset
6318 @ifset POWERPC
6319 * PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6320 @end ifset
6321 @ifset POWERPC64
6322 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6323 @end ifset
6324 @ifset SPU
6325 * SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6326 @end ifset
6327 @ifset TICOFF
6328 * TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
6329 @end ifset
6330 @ifset WIN32
6331 * WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6332 @end ifset
6333 @ifset XTENSA
6334 * Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6335 @end ifset
6336 @end menu
6337 @end ifset
6338
6339 @ifset H8300
6340 @ifclear GENERIC
6341 @raisesections
6342 @end ifclear
6343
6344 @node H8/300
6345 @section @command{ld} and the H8/300
6346
6347 @cindex H8/300 support
6348 For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
6349 you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6350
6351 @table @emph
6352 @cindex relaxing on H8/300
6353 @item relaxing address modes
6354 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6355 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6356 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6357 respectively.
6358
6359 @cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6360 @item synthesizing instructions
6361 @c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
6362 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
6363 sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6364 page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6365 (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6366 @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6367 top page of memory).
6368
6369 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6370 indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6371 displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6372 the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6373 @code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6374 whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6375 range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6376
6377 @item bit manipulation instructions
6378 @command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
6379 biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
6380 which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6381 page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6382 (That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
6383 @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6384 the top page of memory).
6385
6386 @item system control instructions
6387 @command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
6388 32 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
6389 changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6390 (That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
6391 @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6392 the top page of memory).
6393 @end table
6394
6395 @ifclear GENERIC
6396 @lowersections
6397 @end ifclear
6398 @end ifset
6399
6400 @ifclear GENERIC
6401 @ifset Renesas
6402 @c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
6403 @c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6404 @node Renesas
6405 @chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
6406
6407 @command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6408 H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6409 options are required for these chips.
6410 @end ifset
6411 @end ifclear
6412
6413 @ifset I960
6414 @ifclear GENERIC
6415 @raisesections
6416 @end ifclear
6417
6418 @node i960
6419 @section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6420
6421 @cindex i960 support
6422
6423 You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6424 specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6425 family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6426 incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6427 linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6428 libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6429 search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6430
6431 For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6432 well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6433 paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6434 the names
6435
6436 @smallexample
6437 @group
6438 try
6439 libtry.a
6440 tryca
6441 libtryca.a
6442 @end group
6443 @end smallexample
6444
6445 @noindent
6446 The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6447 two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6448
6449 You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6450 the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6451 use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6452 specifies a library.
6453
6454 @cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6455 @cindex relaxing on i960
6456 @command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6457 you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6458 @code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6459 them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6460 instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6461 instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6462 target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6463 not itself call any subroutines).
6464
6465 @ifclear GENERIC
6466 @lowersections
6467 @end ifclear
6468 @end ifset
6469
6470 @ifset ARM
6471 @ifclear GENERIC
6472 @raisesections
6473 @end ifclear
6474
6475 @ifset M68HC11
6476 @ifclear GENERIC
6477 @raisesections
6478 @end ifclear
6479
6480 @node M68HC11/68HC12
6481 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6482
6483 @cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6484
6485 @subsection Linker Relaxation
6486
6487 For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6488 optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6489
6490 @table @emph
6491 @cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6492 @item relaxing address modes
6493 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6494 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6495 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6496 respectively.
6497
6498 @command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6499 transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6500 page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6501
6502 @item relaxing gcc instruction group
6503 When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6504 of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6505 addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6506 @code{bset} instructions.
6507
6508 @end table
6509
6510 @subsection Trampoline Generation
6511
6512 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6513 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6514 For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6515 call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
6516 will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
6517 trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6518 case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6519 point to the function trampoline.
6520
6521 @ifclear GENERIC
6522 @lowersections
6523 @end ifclear
6524 @end ifset
6525
6526 @node ARM
6527 @section @command{ld} and the ARM family
6528
6529 @cindex ARM interworking support
6530 @kindex --support-old-code
6531 For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
6532 between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
6533 been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6534 line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6535 libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6536 option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6537 given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6538 which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6539 the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6540 non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6541
6542 @cindex thumb entry point
6543 @cindex entry point, thumb
6544 @kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6545 The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6546 @samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6547 But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6548 branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6549 executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6550
6551 @cindex PE import table prefixing
6552 @kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6553 The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6554 the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
6555 element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
6556 import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6557
6558 @cindex BE8
6559 @kindex --be8
6560 The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6561 executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6562 objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6563 option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6564 little-endian code.
6565
6566 @cindex TARGET1
6567 @kindex --target1-rel
6568 @kindex --target1-abs
6569 The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6570 @samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6571 or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6572 and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6573
6574 @cindex TARGET2
6575 @kindex --target2=@var{type}
6576 The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6577 @samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6578 meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6579 @table @samp
6580 @item rel
6581 @samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6582 @item abs
6583 @samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
6584 @item got-rel
6585 @samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6586 @end table
6587
6588 @cindex FIX_V4BX
6589 @kindex --fix-v4bx
6590 The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6591 specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6592 interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6593 also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6594
6595 In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6596 linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6597 @code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6598
6599 In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6600 relocations are ignored.
6601
6602 @cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6603 @kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6604 Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6605 relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6606
6607 @smallexample
6608 TST rM, #1
6609 MOVEQ PC, rM
6610 BX Rn
6611 @end smallexample
6612
6613 This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6614 and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
6615 condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
6616
6617 @cindex USE_BLX
6618 @kindex --use-blx
6619 The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6620 BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6621 situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6622 code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6623 each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6624
6625 This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6626 specify it if you are using that target.
6627
6628 @cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6629 @kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6630 The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6631 bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6632 instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6633 to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6634 the support code can read the intended values.
6635
6636 The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6637 intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6638 and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6639 intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6640 full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6641 you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6642
6643 If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6644 enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6645 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6646 mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6647 vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6648 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6649
6650 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6651 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6652 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6653 first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6654 instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6655 the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6656 are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6657
6658 @cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6659 @kindex --fix-arm1176
6660 @kindex --no-fix-arm1176
6661 The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6662 in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6663 are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
6664 unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6665
6666 Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
6667 Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
6668 http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6669
6670 @cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6671 @kindex --no-enum-size-warning
6672 The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6673 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6674 enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6675 linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6676 using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6677 not be diagnosed.
6678
6679 @cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6680 @kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6681 The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6682 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6683 @code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6684 linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6685 using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
6686
6687 @cindex PIC_VENEER
6688 @kindex --pic-veneer
6689 The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6690 ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6691 is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6692 @samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6693
6694 @cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6695 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6696 The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6697 code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6698 perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6699 placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6700 controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6701 The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
6702 duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
6703 group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6704 code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6705 where they should be placed.
6706
6707 The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6708 @option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
6709 placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
6710 branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6711 placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6712 value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6713 exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6714 A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6715 linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6716 from the input sections.
6717
6718 The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6719 @samp{N = +1}.
6720
6721 Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6722 only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6723 otherwise.
6724
6725 @cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6726 @kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6727 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6728 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6729
6730 The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6731
6732 @cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
6733 @kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
6734 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
6735 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
6736
6737 Please contact ARM for further details.
6738
6739 @kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6740 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6741 @cindex Merging exidx entries
6742 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6743
6744 @kindex --long-plt
6745 @cindex 32-bit PLT entries
6746 The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
6747 which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
6748 entries which only support 512Mb of code.
6749
6750 @ifclear GENERIC
6751 @lowersections
6752 @end ifclear
6753 @end ifset
6754
6755 @ifset HPPA
6756 @ifclear GENERIC
6757 @raisesections
6758 @end ifclear
6759
6760 @node HPPA ELF32
6761 @section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6762 @cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6763 @kindex --multi-subspace
6764 When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6765 import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6766 The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6767 stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6768 multiple sub-spaces.
6769
6770 @cindex HPPA stub grouping
6771 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6772 Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6773 stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6774 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6775 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6776 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6777 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6778 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6779 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6780 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6781 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6782 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6783 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6784 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6785 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6786
6787 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6788 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6789 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6790 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6791
6792 @ifclear GENERIC
6793 @lowersections
6794 @end ifclear
6795 @end ifset
6796
6797 @ifset M68K
6798 @ifclear GENERIC
6799 @raisesections
6800 @end ifclear
6801
6802 @node M68K
6803 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6804
6805 @cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6806 @kindex --got=@var{type}
6807 The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6808 The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6809 @samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6810 the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6811 @samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6812 entries only at non-negative offsets.
6813 @samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6814 entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6815 support such GOTs.
6816 @samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6817 output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6818 file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6819 files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6820
6821 @ifclear GENERIC
6822 @lowersections
6823 @end ifclear
6824 @end ifset
6825
6826 @ifset MIPS
6827 @ifclear GENERIC
6828 @raisesections
6829 @end ifclear
6830
6831 @node MIPS
6832 @section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6833
6834 @cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
6835 @kindex --insn32
6836 @kindex --no-insn32
6837 The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
6838 microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
6839 in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
6840 used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
6841 or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
6842 including 16-bit ones where possible.
6843
6844 @ifclear GENERIC
6845 @lowersections
6846 @end ifclear
6847 @end ifset
6848
6849 @ifset MMIX
6850 @ifclear GENERIC
6851 @raisesections
6852 @end ifclear
6853
6854 @node MMIX
6855 @section @code{ld} and MMIX
6856 For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6857 @code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6858 understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6859 can translate between the two formats.
6860
6861 There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6862 Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6863 registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6864 equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6865 @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6866 global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6867 this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6868 symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6869
6870 Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6871 @code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6872 The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6873 of a section.
6874
6875 Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6876 are left out from an mmo file.
6877
6878 @ifclear GENERIC
6879 @lowersections
6880 @end ifclear
6881 @end ifset
6882
6883 @ifset MSP430
6884 @ifclear GENERIC
6885 @raisesections
6886 @end ifclear
6887
6888 @node MSP430
6889 @section @code{ld} and MSP430
6890 For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6891 will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6892 just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6893
6894 @cindex MSP430 extra sections
6895 The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6896
6897 @table @code
6898 @item @samp{.vectors}
6899 Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6900
6901 @item @samp{.bootloader}
6902 Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6903 in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6904
6905 @item @samp{.infomem}
6906 Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6907 this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6908
6909 @item @samp{.infomemnobits}
6910 This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6911 in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6912
6913 @item @samp{.noinit}
6914 Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6915
6916 The last two sections are used by gcc.
6917 @end table
6918
6919 @ifclear GENERIC
6920 @lowersections
6921 @end ifclear
6922 @end ifset
6923
6924 @ifset NDS32
6925 @ifclear GENERIC
6926 @raisesections
6927 @end ifclear
6928
6929 @node NDS32
6930 @section @code{ld} and NDS32
6931 @kindex relaxing on NDS32
6932 For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
6933 relaxes objects according to these options.
6934
6935 @table @code
6936 @item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
6937 Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
6938
6939 @item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
6940 Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
6941
6942 @item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
6943 Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
6944
6945 @item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
6946 Export the EX9 table after linking.
6947
6948 @item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
6949 Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
6950
6951 @item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
6952 Update the existing EX9 table.
6953
6954 @item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
6955 Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
6956
6957 @item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
6958 Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
6959
6960 @item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
6961 Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
6962
6963 @item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
6964 Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
6965 @end table
6966
6967 @ifclear GENERIC
6968 @lowersections
6969 @end ifclear
6970 @end ifset
6971
6972 @ifset NIOSII
6973 @ifclear GENERIC
6974 @raisesections
6975 @end ifclear
6976
6977 @node Nios II
6978 @section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6979 @cindex Nios II call relaxation
6980 @kindex --relax on Nios II
6981
6982 Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
6983 transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
6984 which may result in @command{ld} giving
6985 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6986 The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
6987 trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
6988 outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
6989 trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
6990 be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
6991 larger than 256MB.
6992
6993 The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
6994 is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
6995 @option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
6996 locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
6997 source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
6998 register as a temporary.
6999
7000 Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7001 relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7002 option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7003
7004 @ifclear GENERIC
7005 @lowersections
7006 @end ifclear
7007 @end ifset
7008
7009 @ifset POWERPC
7010 @ifclear GENERIC
7011 @raisesections
7012 @end ifclear
7013
7014 @node PowerPC ELF32
7015 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7016 @cindex PowerPC long branches
7017 @kindex --relax on PowerPC
7018 Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7019 displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7020 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7021 @samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7022 the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7023 section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
7024 section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7025 @samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7026 both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7027 considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
7028
7029 @cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7030 @table @option
7031 @cindex PowerPC PLT
7032 @kindex --bss-plt
7033 @item --bss-plt
7034 Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7035 generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7036 the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7037 writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7038 @command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7039 PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7040 compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7041 BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7042
7043 @kindex --secure-plt
7044 @item --secure-plt
7045 @command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7046 @samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7047 when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7048 layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7049 style BSS PLT.
7050
7051 @cindex PowerPC GOT
7052 @kindex --sdata-got
7053 @item --sdata-got
7054 The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7055 sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7056 @code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7057 section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7058 @code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7059 @code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7060 @samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7061 @code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7062 PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7063 pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7064 GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7065 really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7066
7067 @cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7068 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7069 @item --emit-stub-syms
7070 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7071 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7072
7073 @cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7074 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7075 @item --no-tls-optimize
7076 PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7077 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7078 disable the optimization.
7079 @end table
7080
7081 @ifclear GENERIC
7082 @lowersections
7083 @end ifclear
7084 @end ifset
7085
7086 @ifset POWERPC64
7087 @ifclear GENERIC
7088 @raisesections
7089 @end ifclear
7090
7091 @node PowerPC64 ELF64
7092 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7093
7094 @cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7095 @table @option
7096 @cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7097 @kindex --stub-group-size
7098 @item --stub-group-size
7099 Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7100 by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7101 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7102 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7103 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7104 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7105 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7106 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7107 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7108 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7109 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7110 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7111 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7112 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7113
7114 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7115 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7116 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7117 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7118
7119 @cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7120 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7121 @item --emit-stub-syms
7122 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7123 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7124
7125 @cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7126 @kindex --dotsyms
7127 @kindex --no-dotsyms
7128 @item --dotsyms
7129 @itemx --no-dotsyms
7130 These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7131 in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7132 function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7133 code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7134 properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7135 to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7136 @samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7137 dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7138 feature.
7139
7140 @cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7141 @kindex --save-restore-funcs
7142 @kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
7143 @item --save-restore-funcs
7144 @itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7145 These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7146 provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7147 @samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7148 function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7149 link.
7150
7151 @cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7152 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7153 @item --no-tls-optimize
7154 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7155 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7156 disable the optimization.
7157
7158 @cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7159 @kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7160 @kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7161 @item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7162 @itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7163 These options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7164 stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7165 an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7166 @code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
7167 stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables this
7168 option when glibc advertises the availability of __tls_get_addr_opt.
7169 Forcing this option on when using an older glibc won't do much besides
7170 slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking an
7171 application against an older glibc with the expectation that it will
7172 normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7173
7174 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7175 @kindex --no-opd-optimize
7176 @item --no-opd-optimize
7177 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7178 corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
7179 the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
7180 Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7181
7182 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7183 @kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7184 @item --non-overlapping-opd
7185 Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7186 @code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7187 the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7188 entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7189
7190 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7191 @kindex --no-toc-optimize
7192 @item --no-toc-optimize
7193 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7194 entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7195 reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7196 marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7197 marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7198 relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7199 unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7200 reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7201 discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7202 reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7203 code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7204 optimization.
7205
7206 @cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7207 @kindex --no-multi-toc
7208 @item --no-multi-toc
7209 If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7210 @code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7211 where TOC
7212 entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7213 total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7214 grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7215 TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7216 calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7217 help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
7218 64K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7219 Use this option to turn off this feature.
7220
7221 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7222 @kindex --no-toc-sort
7223 @item --no-toc-sort
7224 By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7225 happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7226 placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7227 with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7228 referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7229 @code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7230 results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7231 off this feature.
7232
7233 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7234 @kindex --plt-align
7235 @kindex --no-plt-align
7236 @item --plt-align
7237 @itemx --no-plt-align
7238 Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
7239 padded so that they don't cross a 32-byte boundary, or to the
7240 specified power of two boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. Note
7241 that this isn't alignment in the usual sense. By default PLT call
7242 stubs are packed tightly.
7243
7244 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7245 @kindex --plt-static-chain
7246 @kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7247 @item --plt-static-chain
7248 @itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7249 Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7250 chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7251 chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7252
7253 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7254 @kindex --plt-thread-safe
7255 @kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7256 @item --plt-thread-safe
7257 @itemx --no-thread-safe
7258 With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7259 lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7260 another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7261 order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7262 memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7263 barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7264 looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7265 seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7266 default behaviour.
7267 @end table
7268
7269 @ifclear GENERIC
7270 @lowersections
7271 @end ifclear
7272 @end ifset
7273
7274 @ifset SPU
7275 @ifclear GENERIC
7276 @raisesections
7277 @end ifclear
7278
7279 @node SPU ELF
7280 @section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7281
7282 @cindex SPU ELF options
7283 @table @option
7284
7285 @cindex SPU plugins
7286 @kindex --plugin
7287 @item --plugin
7288 This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7289
7290 @cindex SPU overlays
7291 @kindex --no-overlays
7292 @item --no-overlays
7293 Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7294 regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7295 @command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7296 turns off all this special overlay handling.
7297
7298 @cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7299 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7300 @item --emit-stub-syms
7301 This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7302 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7303
7304 @cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7305 @kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7306 @item --extra-overlay-stubs
7307 This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7308 function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7309 on calls to non-overlay regions.
7310
7311 @cindex SPU local store size
7312 @kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7313 @item --local-store=lo:hi
7314 @command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7315 the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7316 range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7317
7318 @cindex SPU
7319 @kindex --stack-analysis
7320 @item --stack-analysis
7321 SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7322 unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7323 under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7324 @command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7325 @command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7326 determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7327 for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7328 for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7329 for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7330 find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7331 and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7332 under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7333 dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7334 is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7335 and calls will be given.
7336
7337 @cindex SPU
7338 @kindex --emit-stack-syms
7339 @item --emit-stack-syms
7340 This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7341 in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7342 These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7343 functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7344 functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7345 such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7346 The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
7347 @code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
7348 @end table
7349
7350 @ifclear GENERIC
7351 @lowersections
7352 @end ifclear
7353 @end ifset
7354
7355 @ifset TICOFF
7356 @ifclear GENERIC
7357 @raisesections
7358 @end ifclear
7359
7360 @node TI COFF
7361 @section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7362 @cindex TI COFF versions
7363 @kindex --format=@var{version}
7364 The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7365 TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7366 also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7367 format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7368 header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7369
7370 @ifclear GENERIC
7371 @lowersections
7372 @end ifclear
7373 @end ifset
7374
7375 @ifset WIN32
7376 @ifclear GENERIC
7377 @raisesections
7378 @end ifclear
7379
7380 @node WIN32
7381 @section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7382
7383 This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
7384 See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
7385 command line options mentioned here.
7386
7387 @table @emph
7388 @cindex import libraries
7389 @item import libraries
7390 The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
7391 libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
7392 regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7393 archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
7394 support for creating such libraries provided with the
7395 @samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7396
7397 @item exporting DLL symbols
7398 @cindex exporting DLL symbols
7399 The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7400
7401 @table @emph
7402 @item using auto-export functionality
7403 @cindex using auto-export functionality
7404 By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7405 which is controlled by the following command line options:
7406
7407 @itemize
7408 @item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7409 @item --exclude-symbols
7410 @item --exclude-libs
7411 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib
7412 @item --version-script
7413 @end itemize
7414
7415 When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7416 (global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7417 symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7418 often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7419 private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
7420 options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
7421 exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7422 final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7423
7424 If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
7425 command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7426 if either of the following are true:
7427
7428 @itemize
7429 @item A DEF file is used.
7430 @item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7431 @end itemize
7432
7433 @item using a DEF file
7434 @cindex using a DEF file
7435 Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7436 an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7437 exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7438 name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
7439 command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
7440
7441 @example
7442 gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7443 @end example
7444
7445 Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7446 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7447
7448 Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7449
7450 @example
7451 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
7452
7453 EXPORTS
7454 foo
7455 bar
7456 _bar = bar
7457 another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7458 var1 DATA
7459 doo = foo == foo2
7460 eoo DATA == var1
7461 @end example
7462
7463 This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
7464 symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7465 alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7466 by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7467 @code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7468 @code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7469 export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7470 in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7471 symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
7472
7473 The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7474 name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7475 the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7476
7477 When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7478 library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
7479 @code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
7480 executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
7481
7482 With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7483 specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
7484 non-default base address for the image.
7485
7486 If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
7487 or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7488 filename specified on the command line.
7489
7490 The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7491
7492 @example
7493 EXPORTS
7494 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7495 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7496 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
7497 @end example
7498
7499 Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7500 @samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7501 @samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7502 @samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7503 Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7504 @samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7505 string in import/export table for the symbol.
7506
7507 The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7508
7509 @code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7510 will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7511 by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7512 linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7513 library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7514
7515 @code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7516 The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7517 the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7518 @code{*_imp__foo}).
7519
7520 @code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7521 well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7522 read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7523 variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7524 the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7525 extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7526 application will behave unexpectedly.
7527
7528 @code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7529 it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7530 symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7531 API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7532 the DLL without an import library.
7533
7534 See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7535 other DEF file statements
7536
7537 @cindex creating a DEF file
7538 While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7539 with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
7540
7541 @item Using decorations
7542 @cindex Using decorations
7543 Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7544 itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7545 declared as:
7546
7547 @example
7548 __declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7549 __declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7550 @end example
7551
7552 All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7553 any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7554 this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7555 the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7556
7557 Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
7558 decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
7559 instead:
7560
7561 @example
7562 __declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7563 __declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7564 @end example
7565
7566 This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7567 when included by the library itself the header must declare the
7568 variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7569 code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
7570 of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
7571 omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7572 @samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
7573 information.
7574 @end table
7575
7576 @cindex automatic data imports
7577 @item automatic data imports
7578 The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
7579 by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
7580 compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
7581 issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
7582 code to these platforms, especially for large
7583 c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
7584 initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
7585 decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
7586 platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
7587 command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7588 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7589 suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7590 trigger the feature's use.
7591
7592 auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
7593 additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7594
7595 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
7596 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7597
7598 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7599 occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7600 One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
7601 below.
7602
7603 @cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
7604 For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7605 object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7606 offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7607 field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7608 in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
7609 without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
7610 The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
7611 references.
7612
7613 The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7614 be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7615 themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7616 runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7617 compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7618 support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
7619 run without error on an older system.
7620
7621 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7622 enabled as needed.
7623
7624 @cindex direct linking to a dll
7625 @item direct linking to a dll
7626 The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7627 including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
7628 libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
7629 traditional import library method, especially when linking large
7630 libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7631 function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7632 though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
7633 storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
7634 tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
7635 large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7636
7637 Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
7638 @samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
7639 of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
7640 perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7641 select the dll instead of an import library.
7642
7643
7644 For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7645 to find, in the first directory of its search path,
7646
7647 @example
7648 libxxx.dll.a
7649 xxx.dll.a
7650 libxxx.a
7651 xxx.lib
7652 cygxxx.dll (*)
7653 libxxx.dll
7654 xxx.dll
7655 @end example
7656
7657 before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7658
7659 (*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7660 where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7661 @samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7662 file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
7663 @samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7664
7665 Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7666 @samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
7667 was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7668 various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7669 could coexist on the same machine.
7670
7671 The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7672 applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
7673 libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
7674
7675 @example
7676 bin/
7677 cygxxx.dll
7678 lib/
7679 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
7680 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
7681 @end example
7682
7683 Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7684 done two ways:
7685
7686 1. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7687 @example
7688 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
7689 @end example
7690
7691 However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7692 (@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7693 @samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7694 not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7695
7696 2. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7697 directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7698 should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7699 making the app/dll.
7700
7701 @example
7702 ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
7703 @end example
7704
7705 Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7706
7707 @example
7708 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
7709 @end example
7710
7711 This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7712 perfectly legal
7713
7714 @example
7715 bin/
7716 cygxxx-5.dll
7717 lib/
7718 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
7719 @end example
7720
7721 Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
7722 even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7723 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7724
7725 Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
7726 wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
7727
7728 1. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7729 work with auto-imported data.
7730
7731 2. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7732 import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7733 symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7734 for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7735 possible to do this without an import lib.
7736
7737 3. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7738 critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7739 in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7740 stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7741
7742 So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
7743 true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7744 a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7745 binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
7746 massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7747 requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7748 will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
7749
7750 @item symbol aliasing
7751 @table @emph
7752 @item adding additional names
7753 Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
7754 A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7755 exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7756 when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
7757 import library. Consider the following DEF file:
7758
7759 @example
7760 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7761
7762 EXPORTS
7763 foo
7764 _foo = foo
7765 @end example
7766
7767 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7768
7769 Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7770 source code using the "weak" attribute:
7771
7772 @example
7773 void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
7774 void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
7775 @end example
7776
7777 See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7778 symbols.
7779
7780 @item renaming symbols
7781 Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
7782 kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
7783 @samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7784 DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
7785 created). In the following example:
7786
7787 @example
7788 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7789
7790 EXPORTS
7791 _foo = foo
7792 @end example
7793
7794 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7795 @samp{_foo}.
7796 @end table
7797
7798 Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
7799 unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
7800 If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
7801 @emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7802 that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7803 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7804 renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7805 to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7806 the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7807 In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
7808 which is probably not what you wanted.
7809
7810 @cindex weak externals
7811 @item weak externals
7812 The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7813 weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7814 defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7815 are three variants of weak externals:
7816 @itemize
7817 @item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7818 called lazy externals.
7819 @item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7820 This form is not presently implemented.
7821 @item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7822 implemented.
7823 @end itemize
7824 As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7825 are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7826 uses a default value.
7827
7828 @cindex aligned common symbols
7829 @item aligned common symbols
7830 As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7831 desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
7832 the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7833 carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7834 by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
7835 tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7836 but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7837 warnings about unknown linker directives.
7838
7839 @end table
7840
7841 @ifclear GENERIC
7842 @lowersections
7843 @end ifclear
7844 @end ifset
7845
7846 @ifset XTENSA
7847 @ifclear GENERIC
7848 @raisesections
7849 @end ifclear
7850
7851 @node Xtensa
7852 @section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
7853
7854 @cindex Xtensa processors
7855 The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7856 @code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7857 specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7858 keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
7859 example, with the command:
7860
7861 @smallexample
7862 SECTIONS
7863 @{
7864 .text : @{
7865 *(.literal .text)
7866 @}
7867 @}
7868 @end smallexample
7869
7870 @noindent
7871 @command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7872 and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7873 literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
7874 interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7875 group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7876 files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7877 and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
7878
7879 @cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
7880 @cindex relaxing on Xtensa
7881 Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7882 provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
7883 is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
7884 literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7885 will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7886 location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7887 the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
7888 unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7889 @code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7890 range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7891
7892 For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7893 to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7894 instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7895 instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7896 instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
7897 @code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7898 hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7899 By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7900 switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7901 density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7902 instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
7903 performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7904 linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7905 a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7906
7907 The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7908 control the linker:
7909
7910 @cindex Xtensa options
7911 @table @option
7912 @item --size-opt
7913 When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7914 more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7915 no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7916 alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7917 preserve the correctness of the code.
7918 @end table
7919
7920 @ifclear GENERIC
7921 @lowersections
7922 @end ifclear
7923 @end ifset
7924
7925 @ifclear SingleFormat
7926 @node BFD
7927 @chapter BFD
7928
7929 @cindex back end
7930 @cindex object file management
7931 @cindex object formats available
7932 @kindex objdump -i
7933 The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
7934 These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
7935 object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
7936 format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
7937 it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
7938 associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
7939 object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
7940 (@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
7941 list all the formats available for your configuration.
7942
7943 @cindex BFD requirements
7944 @cindex requirements for BFD
7945 As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
7946 several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
7947 BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
7948 formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
7949 been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
7950 BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
7951 may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
7952
7953 One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
7954 mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
7955 useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
7956 conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
7957
7958 @menu
7959 * BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
7960 @end menu
7961
7962 @node BFD outline
7963 @section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
7964 @cindex opening object files
7965 @include bfdsumm.texi
7966 @end ifclear
7967
7968 @node Reporting Bugs
7969 @chapter Reporting Bugs
7970 @cindex bugs in @command{ld}
7971 @cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
7972
7973 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
7974
7975 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
7976 it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
7977 to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
7978 work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
7979 @command{ld}.
7980
7981 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7982 information that enables us to fix the bug.
7983
7984 @menu
7985 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7986 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7987 @end menu
7988
7989 @node Bug Criteria
7990 @section Have You Found a Bug?
7991 @cindex bug criteria
7992
7993 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7994
7995 @itemize @bullet
7996 @cindex fatal signal
7997 @cindex linker crash
7998 @cindex crash of linker
7999 @item
8000 If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
8001 @command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
8002
8003 @cindex error on valid input
8004 @item
8005 If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
8006
8007 @cindex invalid input
8008 @item
8009 If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
8010 may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8011 object files are correct.
8012
8013 @item
8014 If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
8015 improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
8016 @end itemize
8017
8018 @node Bug Reporting
8019 @section How to Report Bugs
8020 @cindex bug reports
8021 @cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
8022
8023 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
8024 products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
8025 recommend you contact that organization first.
8026
8027 You can find contact information for many support companies and
8028 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8029 distribution.
8030
8031 @ifset BUGURL
8032 Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
8033 @value{BUGURL}.
8034 @end ifset
8035
8036 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8037 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8038 fact or leave it out, state it!
8039
8040 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8041 problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
8042 assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8043 matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8044 the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8045 location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8046 were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8047 into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8048 specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
8049 and the most helpful.
8050
8051 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8052 the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8053 on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
8054
8055 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
8056 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8057 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8058 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
8059
8060 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8061
8062 @itemize @bullet
8063 @item
8064 The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
8065 the @samp{--version} argument.
8066
8067 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
8068 the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
8069
8070 @item
8071 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
8072 patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8073
8074 @item
8075 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8076 version number.
8077
8078 @item
8079 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
8080 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8081
8082 @item
8083 The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8084 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8085 list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8086 sufficient.
8087
8088 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8089 and then we might not encounter the bug.
8090
8091 @item
8092 A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
8093 bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8094 provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8095 bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8096 state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8097 requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8098 we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8099 attachments are best.
8100
8101 If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8102 @code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8103 object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8104 @code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8105 how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8106
8107 @item
8108 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8109 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8110
8111 Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
8112 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8113 not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8114 a chance to make a mistake.
8115
8116 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8117 say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
8118 copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
8119 C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8120 and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8121 fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8122 you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8123 any conclusion from our observations.
8124
8125 @item
8126 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
8127 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8128 @samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
8129 If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
8130 context, not by line number.
8131
8132 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8133 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8134 @end itemize
8135
8136 Here are some things that are not necessary:
8137
8138 @itemize @bullet
8139 @item
8140 A description of the envelope of the bug.
8141
8142 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8143 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8144 changes will not affect it.
8145
8146 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8147 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8148 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8149 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8150
8151 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8152 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8153 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8154 less time, and so on.
8155
8156 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8157 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8158
8159 @item
8160 A patch for the bug.
8161
8162 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8163 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8164 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8165 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8166
8167 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
8168 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8169 through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8170 able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8171 fixed.
8172
8173 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8174 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8175 help us to understand.
8176
8177 @item
8178 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8179
8180 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8181 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8182 @end itemize
8183
8184 @node MRI
8185 @appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8186 @cindex MRI compatibility
8187 To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8188 linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
8189 alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8190 described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8191 simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
8192 @command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
8193 linker commands; these commands are described here.
8194
8195 In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8196 file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8197 features to make use of them.
8198
8199 You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8200 @samp{-c} command-line option.
8201
8202 Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8203 command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8204 blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
8205 MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
8206 issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8207
8208 Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8209
8210 You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8211 lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8212 The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8213
8214 @table @code
8215 @cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8216 @item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8217 @itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8218 Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
8219 the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8220 @code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8221 your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8222 script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8223 commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8224 input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8225 @code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8226
8227 @cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8228 @item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8229 Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8230 in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8231
8232 @var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8233
8234 @cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8235 @item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8236 Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8237 @var{expression} should be a power of two.
8238
8239 @cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8240 @item BASE @var{expression}
8241 Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8242 absolute addresses) in the output file.
8243
8244 @cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8245 @item CHIP @var{expression}
8246 @itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8247 This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8248
8249 @cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8250 @item END
8251 This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8252
8253 @cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8254 @item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8255 Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
8256 language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
8257
8258 @enumerate
8259 @item
8260 S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8261
8262 @item
8263 IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
8264
8265 @item
8266 COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
8267 @samp{COFF}
8268 @end enumerate
8269
8270 @cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8271 @item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8272 Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
8273 @command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
8274
8275 The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8276 same line, with no change in its effect.
8277
8278 @cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8279 @item LOAD @var{filename}
8280 @itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8281 Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
8282 same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
8283 command line.
8284
8285 @cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8286 @item NAME @var{output-name}
8287 @var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
8288 MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8289 option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8290
8291 @cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8292 @item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8293 @itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
8294 Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
8295 order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8296 script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8297 sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8298 file, in the order specified.
8299
8300 @cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8301 @item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8302 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8303 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8304 Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8305 @var{name} used in the linker input files.
8306
8307 @cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8308 @item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8309 @itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8310 @itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8311 You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8312 specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8313 If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8314 @var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8315 @end table
8316
8317 @node GNU Free Documentation License
8318 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
8319 @include fdl.texi
8320
8321 @node LD Index
8322 @unnumbered LD Index
8323
8324 @printindex cp
8325
8326 @tex
8327 % I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
8328 % meantime:
8329 \long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8330 \centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8331 \centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8332 \centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8333 \centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8334 \centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8335 \centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8336 \centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8337 \page\colophon
8338 % Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
8339 @end tex
8340
8341 @bye
This page took 0.204364 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.